Sie sind auf Seite 1von 329

THE DOCUMENT COMPANY

XEROX

WorkCentre XD Series Copier/ Printer Service Documentation

701P I 7370 April 2000

\t/

CAUTION Cerbin components in the WorkCentre XD Series CopierIPrinter are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge. Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.

Introduction
.,.
About This Manual . .................................................................. . . .................................................................................................... Organ~zat~on How to Use This Manual Other Information Reference Symbology
3 3 4 5 6

Introduction Workcentre XD SERIES

manuals4you.com

introduction

Workcentre XD SERIES

About This Manual


This manual is part of a documentation system which also includes training.This manual contains Repair Analysis Procedures, Repair Procedures, Adjustment Procedures, Parts List, Diagnostic Procedures, and Wiring Data information that will enable a Service Representative to repair the WorkCentre XD Series family of copierlprinters (XD1001XD1021XD103f1XD1041 XDl05flXDl20fIXDI 25flXD13OdflXDI 55df).

Organization
This manual is divided into seven sections. The title and description of each section is listed below. A Publication Comment Sheet is provided at the end of this manual.

Section 1 - SERVICE CALL PROCEDURES


This section contains the following: Initial ActionsISystem Checks System Checkout Final Action initial ActionsISystem Checks This identifies how to collect the data necessary to decide how to proceed with the service call. It classifies the problem and refers you to the appropriate Repair Analysis Procedure. System Checkout The System Checkout procedure is used to verify that the copier is operating properly after a repair has been made. Final Action The Final Action procedure identifies the steps that must be performed before closing out the service call.

Section 2 - REPAIR ANALYSIS PROCEDURES (RAPS)


This section contains the Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs) necessary to repair faults. When using a RAP, always exit the procedure when the fault is fixed. Do not perform the remaining steps.

Section 3 lMAGE QUALITY REPAIR ANALYSIS PROCEDURES (RAPS)


This section contains the Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs) necessary to repair copy quality faults. The first RAP, CQl Copy Defect Entry Procedure, is used to classify a copy quality problem and will reference the RAP to be used to repair the problem. When using a RAP, exit the procedure when the fault is fixed. Do not perform the remaining steps.

Section 4 - REPAIRIADJUSTMEMT PROCEDURES


This section contains the repair and adjustment procedures for the WorkCentre XD Series family of copierlprinters (XD100/XD102/XD103flXD104IXDl05flXD120f/XDl25flXD130dfl XD155df).

Section 5 - W R T S LlST
This section contains the detailed Parts List for the WorkCentre XD Series family of copier1 printers (XDlOOIXD102/XD1O3flXDI 04lXD105f/XD120f/XD125f/XD130df/XD155df).

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES
3

introduction

About This Manual, Organization

manuals4you.com

Section 6 - GENERAL PROCEDURES1 GENERAL INFORMATION


This section contains Diagnostic Procedures, Installation and Removal Procedures, and Genera1 information which includes Product Specifications for the WorkCentre XD Series family of copierlprinters (XDI 00lXD102lXDI 03f/XD1041XD105f/XD120f/XD125f/XD130df/XD155df).

How to Use This Manual


introduction
The Service Call Procedures will direct you to the proper section of the Service Manual. You should beg~n the servlce call w~th the l n ~ t ~ Act~onslSystem al Checks Procedure. From there, you w ~ lbe l referred to e~ther Sect~on 2, Status Indicator RAPs or Sect~on 3, Image Qual~ty RAPs perform the CQI Copy Defect Entry Procedure to class~fy If you are sent to Section 3, you w~ll the copy qual~typroblem. You w~ll then be d~rected to the proper RAP to beg~n your troubleshoot~ng From these RAPs you may be referred to other sect~onsof the manual to make checks, adjustments, or to replace parts. When you have made a repalr, return to the System CheckoutIF~nalAct~on to complete the call

Section 7 - WIRING DATA


This section contains PlugIJack Location Drawings and BSDs.

Introduction

Organization, How to Use This Manual

WorkCentre XD SERIES

Other lnforrnationt
The Use of Caution, Warning, and Mote statements
Information relative to the completion of a task in a safe or thorough manner w~ll be supplied In the form of a Caut~on, a Warn~ng, or a Note statement These statements are found throughout the service documentat~on. Cautions, Warnings, and Note statements appear before the steps to which they apply. These statements should be read before continuing to the next step in a procedure. The definition of a Caution, Warning, or Note is as follows: Caution - A Caution statement indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to or destruct~on of equipment. Warning - A Warnlng statement indicates an operating or malntenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury or loss of l~fe Note - A Note statement indicates an operating or maintenance problem, practice, or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently.

Test Pattern 82P524 (NASG & XCL) and 82P523 (XE) will be referred to in this documentation as the Standard Test Pattern. The Density Output Reference Guide, 82P520, and the Copyllmage Quality Rating Guide, 82P284, will also be referred to in this documentation. The terms "dry ink" and "tone? are interchangeable.

Conventions
The conventions that are used in this service documentation are presented in the table below. Table 2 Table 2 Conventions [nn-nn] E7-[nn] bolding Hyphenated numbers enclosed in brackets indicate a diagnostic code to be used Code has more than one subWhen a Statu~s code, the subcode will appear in brackets. When used in a sentence beginning with "Press the", any bolded numbers or words will represent an actual keypad button on the Control Console.

The Use of Acronyms, Abbreviations, Specific or Unique Terms, and Conventions


A list of acronyms and abbreviations used in this service documentation is located in the table below. Table 1 Table 1 General Acronyms

Specific Terms Introduction Workcentre XD SERIES

Other information
manuals4you.com

Reference Symbology
Reference Symbols
The reference symbols (icons) used in this documentation denote supportive data which can be found in other sections of this documentation. The purpose of these symbols is to inform the Service Representative of procedures, adjustments, or other information that is important for successful diagnosis and repair.

Schematic Symbols
These symbols represent electrical and mechanical components or devices that are commonly found in Xerox equipment. These symbols are included as an aid to understanding the representations used in the Circuit Diagrams (CDs).

AC and DC Voltage References


The expected AC and DC voltage levels found in this machine are defined in this section. These specifications represent the expected range for AC (machine input power source) and DC (machine internal power supplies) voltages that are encountered during normal operation.

Abbreviaf ions
The table below lists the electrical wire colors that are identified in this service documentation and reflects the use of standardized abbreviations. Table I Table 1 Wire Color Abbreviations
Abbreviation Wire Color

BLK BLU BRN GRAY GRN GN ORN PINK RED VIO WHT YEL YIG

black blue brown gray green greenlyellow orange pink red violet white yellow yellowlgreen

Introduction

Reference Symbology

Workcentre XD SERIES

REFERENCE SYMBOLOGY
Notes, adjustments, and parts lists support the checklists and the RAP information, ~h~ symbols that refer to this supportive data are shown below.

Miscellaneous Symbols Descriptions of all commonly used graphic symbols are included in order to help you in troubleshooting when performing the RAP'S. Standby Power Input

Note

This symbol is used to refer to notes found on the same page

+24 m C

This symbol indicates the continuation of a standby power line that is interrupted in the vertical direction.

Adjustments

Feed Back
ADJ 4.1 This symbol refers to an adjustment procedure located in Section 4 of this Service Documentation. The number adjacent to the symbol indicates the number that is assigned to that adjustment

This symbol indicates a feedback signal.

Parts List

Flag
This number refers to the parts list located in section 5 of the Service Manual. The number after the PL designation indicates the number that is assigned to that parts list.

q0'6

D
Ground

This symbol indicates an area of a Circuit Diagram that you should check.

Switches and Relay Contacts

n 0 -

This symbol indicates a machine ground. Safety interlock switch that is open.

2 G -

LEDlPhototransistor Sensor
Safety Interlock swltch that is closed Th~s type of sensor IS used In the document and paper path. It uses reflected light to swltch the sensor off and on.

Switch or relay contacts with momentary contacts shown normally open.

Switch or relay contacts wtth momentary contacts shown normally closed.

Introduction Workcentre XD SERIES

Reference Symbology
manuals4you.com

Without Tag Change

Signal Nomenclature
The signal is named to imply the condition of the machine when the signal is available. For example:

This symbol indicates that the area to which the triangle points has not been modified by the tag number in the circle. This symbol indicates that the entire page has not been modified by the tag number in the circle.

DOCUMENT JAM SENSED (L) +5 VDC


1

With Tag Change

3
This symbol indicates that the area to which the triangle points has been modified by the tag number in the circle. This symbol indicates that the entire page has been modified by the tag number in the circle.

DOCUMENT JAM SENSED=Slgnal Name (L) = Loglc State when the slgnal IS ava~lable In ~ t s named state. In thls case the slgnal IS Lo when a document jam IS sensed +5 VDC=Loglc level when the slgnal IS HI

DC Voltage Levels DC Voltages should be measured between the test polnt and the rnachlne frame, unless Instructed othetwlse. Table 2 Table 2 DC Voltage Levels

WARNING
This symbol is used to warn of possibIe eye damage from a beams if service procedures are not foilowed exactly as wr1tfei.n.

laser

CAUTION

Logic Voltage Levels Measurements of logic levels must be made with reference to the specified ground point, unless some other point is referenced in a diagnostic procedure. Table 3 Table 3 Logic Voltage Levels Actual Voltage Ranges
+4.8 VDC to +5.2 VDC
+5 VDC

This symbol is used when components in the copier are suscep!ibli3 I-o damage h m eiectroslaiic discharge. Observe ESD procedures to avoid component damage.

0.0 VDC to +1.0 VDC +22.0 VDC to +25.7 VDC 0.0 VDC to +3.0 VDC

WARNING A warning is used to alert the personnel to an gapelating or


meinte-

+24 VDC

nance procedure, practice, or condltagan that, if not strictiy observed could result in injury o r Boss of life.

CAUBIiON A caution is used lo alert the personnel io an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that if not siriciiy observed, could resuit /n

damage io, or deslrriclion o f equipmeiii.

Introduction

Reference Symbology

4/00

Workcentre XD SERIES

1 Service Call Procedures


lntroduction
Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1-3

Copier Maintenance
Copier Maintenance ......................................................................................................
1-4
1-5

Initial ActionslSystem Checks

..

Initial ActionsISystem Checks ........................................................................................

Status Codeslother Faults Listing


Status Codeslother Faults Listing ..................................................................................
1-6 1-8

System CheckouVFinal Action


System CheckoutIFinal Action .......................................................................................

Service Call Procedures Workcentre XD SERIES

manuals4you.com

Service Call Procedures

4/00 6 -2

Workcentre XD SERlES

introduction
Use the Serv~ceCall Procedures as a maintenance gu~de when perform~ngservlce on the WorkCentre XD Series family of cop~erlprinters(XD1001 XD1021 XD103fl XD1041 XDl O5fl XDl20fl XD125f 1 XD130dfl XD155df) . The procedure has been des~gned to be used wlth the fam~ly Serv~ce Documentation WorkCentre XD Ser~es

Copier Maintenance
The maintenancelclean~ng should be performed when the copler IS be~ng serv~ced

initial ActionsISystem Checks This d~agram is des~gned to ~dent~fy and class~fy the copier problem and to refer you to the appropr~ateRAP in order to repalr the problem When the problem has been repalred, perform the System CheckouVFinal Action System CheckouVFinal Actions
Th~s procedure should be completed at the end of every servlce call to ensure that the copy paper and the document are transported properly and to ensure that copy qual~ty is w~th~ spec~f~cat~on. n

Service Call Procedures WorkCentre XD SERIES

Introduction

manuals4you.com

Copier Maintenance
introduction
The following maintenance procedure should be performed when the copierlprinter is serviced. Procedure 1. Clean the following parts every time the copierlprinter is serviced ( TBbie 1). Table 1

3.

Perform the Totaal Copy Count Read procedure in Section 6. Lubricate the following when the total copy count reaches 120,000 ( Table 3). Table 3

Description Mlrror Base Rail


I

Procedure Apply a t h ~ n film of 70P95 Turb~ne 0 1 1 to the upper surface of the rall.

Heat Roll

I Lubricate the gear with 8R983 Fuser Lube.

1 Description
Transfer Corotron Wire

/Procedure

1
Roll bearings)

Clean the Transfer Corotron Wire using the Corotron Cleaner (see the User Guide). Document Glass and SDF Clean using water or 43H12 or 431381 Xerox Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a lint-free Cloth. Document Glass After cleaning, apply one drop of 8R90275 Anti-Static Fluid and spread it evenly from one end of the glass to the other using a lint-free cloth. Perform the Total Copy Count Read procedure in Section 6. Clean the following parts when the total copy count reaches 120,000 ( -Table 2). Table 2 Description Procedure

Perform the Total Copy Count Read procedure In Section 6. Replace the following parts at the intervals shown In the table ( Table 4). Table 4

2.

Document Cover Cushion Clean using Formula A on a lint-free cloth. Clean using Formula A on a lint-free cloth. Optics Frame interior Clean using Film Remover on a lint-free cloth. Mirrors 1, 2, and 3 Clean using 43H12 or 43P81 Lens and Mirror Cleaner on a lintReflector free cloth. Clean using Film Remover on a lint-free cloth Exposure Lamp Lens Focus Correction Lens (Laser Assembly) Clean using Film Remover on a lint-free cloth. Do not open the Laser Assembly. Gently remove dust or toner deposits from the exposed lens surface with a damp cotton swab. Gently remove any remaining dampness from the cleaned lens with a dry swab. Clean using Film Remover on a lint-free cloth.

Transport Roller (Tray 2 Paper Feed Assembly), Upper and Lower Registration Rollers, Exit Rollers

Pressure Roll Str~pper Flngers Strlpper Flnger (3)

122N 133 (230V) 33N169

120,000 120,000

PL 6.2 REP 10.11

7N695

Thermistor herm most at

Clean using Film Remover on a lint-free cloth.

I Clean using Film Remover on a lint-free cloth.

Service Call Procedures

Copier Maintenance

.
Workcentre XD SERIES

initial Aetions/Svslem Cheeks


Initial Actions
1. 2. 3.
QUESTION THE OPERATOR VERIFY, CLASSIFY, AND REPAIR THE PROBLEM REFER TO CUSTOMIZING YOUR COPIER IN THE USER GUIDE AND RECORD THE CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE SETTINGS. STATUS CODES Go to the Status CodesiOther Faults Listing OTHER STATUS INDICATORS (refer to Figure 1 for the locat~ons of LEDs)
-

SDF PRESENT LED WILL NOT COME ON


Go to the 5.1 SDF JAM LED RAP SELECTED PAPER TRAY LED IS FLASHING Go to the 8.1 Paper Tray Ready RAP

Copy Quality Problems


Go to the CQI Copy Defect Entry RAP in Section 3

Status Indicators

Other Faults
COPY COUNT DISPLAY IS BLANK Go to the 1.I Power ON RAP (Without SDF) or the I .I Power On RAP (With SDF) COPIER START PROBLEM Go to the 1 .I Power ON RAP (Without SDF) or the 1.I Power On RAP (With SDF) DEAD MACHINE Go to the 1,1 Power ON RAP (Without SDF) or the 1 .I Power On RAP (With SDF) SELECTION/INDICATION PROBLEM Go to the 2.1 Seiectionilndication RAP (Without SDF) or the 2.1 Seiectionilndication RAP (with SDF) SINGLE SHEET BYPASS TRAY PROBLEMS WITHOUT A FAULT CODE Go to the P Status Code RAP (Wi"ihoul SDF) or the P Status Code RAP (With SDF) ALL OTHER PROBLEMS Go to 2. STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

TONER CARTRIDGE LED ON Go to the Toner Cartridge LED On RAP DRUM CARTRIDGE LED ON Go to the Drum Cartridge LED On RAP COPIER/PRINTER DOCUMENT JAM LED IS ON Go to the E2 Status Code (Without SDFj RAP or the E2 S"itus Code RAP (With SDFj SDF JAM LED IS ON Go to the 5 1 SDF JAM LED RAP

Drum Cartridge LED

SDF Present LED

Toner Cartridge LED

Document Jam LED Paper Tray LEDs

Figure 1 Control Panel Indicator LEDs

Service Call Procedures Workcentre XD SERIES

Initial Actisns/System Checks

manuals4you.com

Status Godes/Ot&er Faults Listing


NOTE: Press the Start button to view the subcode when a status code is displayed on the Control Panel.
Table 1 Status Codes Entry Chart Status Code A1 A2 C1 Subcode Description SDF JAM PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed a jam in the SDF SDF JAM PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed a jam in the SDF FRONT OR SIDE DOOR OPEN The Main PWB sensed that either the Front or the Side Door was open TONER CARTRIDGE PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that the Toner Cartridge was not present PAPER JAM PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that a paper jam exists wrthin the paper path 01 MEMORY ERROR The Main PWB sensed that a problem exrsts with the GDI Memory PWB LASER PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that a problem exists with the Laser Assembly or its circuitry, or with the laser drive circult CCD WHITE LEVEL PROBLEM The Maln PWB sensed that a problem exists with either the CCD drrve circuit or the Exposure Lamp CCD BLACK LEVEL PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that a problem exists with the CCD drive circurt SHADING CORRECTION PROBLEM The Marn PWB sensed that the white value obtalned when the calrbration strip was scanned was incorrect IMAGE PROCESSING PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed a communication problem between the CPU and the image processing (ASIC) chip EXPOSURE LAMP PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that a problem exists with the Exposure Lamp or its clrcuitry, or w~th the exposure lamp driver Corrective Action Go to A1IA2 Status Code RAP Go to ,411.42 Status Code RAP Go to C I Status Code RAP or 6 1 Status Code RAP Go to CM Status Code RAP or CH Stat& Code RAP Go to E2 Status Code (Without SDF) RAP or E2 Status Code RAP (W~th SDF) Go to E7-[Ol] Status Code RAP L1 Go to E7 [03] Status Code RAP or E7-1031 Status Code RAP Go to E7-[04] Status Code RAP or E7-1041 Status Code RAP Go to E7-1051Status Code RAP or E7-1051 Status Code RAP (With SDF) Go to E7-j12j Status Code RAP or E7-1121Status Code RAP (Wrlh SDF) Go to E7-jf 41 Status Code RAP P Go to E7-j15j Status Code RAP (Without SDF) or E7[15] Status Code RAP (With SDF) L3 H4 Status Code H2 Subcode

Table 1 Status Codes Entry Chart Description THERMISTOR PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that the Thermistor RT1 was open Corrective Action Go to H211-13 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) or H21 1-13Status Code RAP (With SSDF)

H3

FUSER OVERHEAT PROBLEMThe Main Go to H21113 Status Code PWB sensed a Fuser overheat condition RAP (Wllhout SDF) or H21 1 1 3Status Code RAP (With SDF) FUSER WARM-UP PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that the Fuser did not reach 185" C within 27 seconds after power on or that the Fuser does not rise above 140" C for 6 seconds during the copy cycle. TONER CARTRIDGE PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that the Toner Cartridge is empty Go to M4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) or H4 Status Code RAP (With SDF)

CH

J1

E2

Go to J I Status Code RAP (Wrthoul SDF) or 3 1 Stat~rs Code RAP (With SDF)

J2 tridge has reached the end of its l~fe SCAN PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that the Exposure Lamp Carriage did not leave the home position after power up or after the Start button was pressed SCAN RETURN PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that the Exposure Lamp Carriage did not return home after power up or after the copy cycle MAIN MOTOR PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed a Main Drive Motor MOT1 problem Go to 11:13 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) or L1/ L3 Status Code RAP (With SDF) Go to 11/13 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) or ill 13 Status Code RAP (Wrth SDF) Go to 14 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) or i 4 Status Code RAP (With SDF)

E7

E7

03

E7

04

E7

05

L4

E7

12

L6

E7

14

LASER PROBLEM Go to L6 Status Code The Maln PWB sensed that the Laser RAP or 16 Status Code Assembly polygon motor failed to achreve RAP (With SDF) the correct operating speed after power up or after the Start button IS pressed PAPER FEED PROBLEMThe Main PWB Go to P Status Code RAP sensed that the selected paper tray IS out (W~thout SDF) or P Status Code RAP (With SDFJ of paper or that a misfeed has occurred 01 MEMORY FAILURE The Main PWB sensed a memory failure GOto U2-jOlj / U2-[04j Status Code RAP

U2

Service Call Procedures

Status GodeslOtheu Faults Listing

Workcentre XD SERIES

Table 1 Status Codes Entry Chart


Status Code Subcode
04

Description

Corrective Action

U2

MEMORY FAILURE
The Main PWB sensed an access error.

GOto U2-[Ol] / U2-[04] Status Code RAP.

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES 1-7

Service Call Procedures

Status Codedother Faults Listing

manuals4you.com

System Gheckout/Final Action


Procedure
Make several copies of the 82P524 Test Pattern side A. (Include 78%, 86%, 129%, and 200%.) Use the alternate tray where applicable. Copies are delivered to the output tray. V N Refer to initial AclionsiSystem Checks to begin your repair.

Evaluate the copies using CQ1 Copy Defect Entry RAP Image quality is acceptable. V N Go to the copy quality RAP identified by the CQI Copy Defect Entry RAP.

Clean the exterior of the machine and provide copy samples of the customers originals.

Service Call Procedures

System CheckouVFinal Action

Workcentre XD SERIES

2 STATUS INDICATOR RAPS


A11A2 Status Code RAP .............................................................................................. 2-3 CH Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ............................................................................ 2-6 CH Status Code RAP (With SDF) ......................... . . . . ................................................ 2-6 C1 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ............................ . . ............................................. 2-7 C1 Status Code RAP (With SDF) .................................................................................... 2-7 E2 Status Code (Without SDF) RAP ..................... . . .................................................... 2-8 E2 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ....................................................................................2-11 2-14 E7-[Ol] Status Code RAP .............................................................................................. 2-14 E7-[03] Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ...................................................................... E7-1031Status Code RAP (With SDF) ............................................................................. 2-15 E7-[04] Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ....................................................................... 2-15 E7-1041Status Code RAP (With SDF) ............................................................................ 2-16 E7-[05] Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ...................... . . ............................................ 2-16 E7-[05] Status Code RAP (With SDF) ................... . . ................................................... 2-17 2-17 E7-[12] Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ........................................................................ E7-[I21 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ............................................................................. 2-18 E7-[I 4 1 Status Code RAP ............................................................................................... 2-18 E7-[I 51 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ........................................................................ 2-19 E7-1151Status Code RAP (With SDF) ............................................................................. 2-19 H21H3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ...................... . . ............................................ 2-20 H2lH3 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ........................................................................... 2-22 1-14 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ................ . . .......................................................... 2-24 H4 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ................................................................................... 2-26 J l Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ............................................................................... 2-28 J1 Status Code RAP (With SDF) .................................................................................... 2-30 J2 Status Code RAP ....................................................................................................... 2-32 2-34 LllL3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ........................................................................ LlIL3 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ..................................... .......................................... 2-36 2-38 L4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ............................................................................... L4 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ................................................................................... 2-39 L6 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ............................................................................... 2-40 L6 Status Code RAP (With SDF) .................................................................................... 2-40 P Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ................................................................................. 2-42 2-44 P Status Code RAP (With SDF) .................................................................................... 2-46 U2-[OI] I U2-1041Status Code RAP ...................... . . .................................................... Drum Cartridge LED On RAP ......................................................................................... 2-46 Toner Cartridge LED On RAP .................... . . ................................................................ 2-47 2-48 1.1 Power ON RAP (Without SDF) ............................................................................... 1.1 Power On RAP (With SDF) ..................................... .................................................. 2-50 2-52 1.2 DC Power RAP (Without SDF) ................................................................................ 2-54 1.2 DC Power (With SDF) .............................................................................................. 2-56 2.1 Selection/lndication RAP (Without SDF) ................................................................... 2-58 2.1 Selection/lndication RAP (with SDF) ....................................................................... 2-60 2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF) ................................................................................. 2-62 2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF) ...................................................................................... 2-64 4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (Without SDF) ...................... . . ................................... 2-65 4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (With SDF) ..................................................................... 2-66 5.1 SDF JAM LED RAP ..................................................................................................
8.1 Paper Tray Ready RAP ............................................................................................ 2-68

'

. . .

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

manuals4you.com

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

4/00

2-2

Workcentre XD SERIES

A1/A2 Status Code RAP


A l , indicates the Main PWB sensed an SDF jam. (The last document should be fed again.)
A2, indicates the Main PWB sensed an SDF jam. (the last 2 documents should be fed again,)

~ n t ethe r diagnostic code [2-21. Using a strip of paper, actuate the SDF Document Path Sensor Q3. The machine Jam indicator lamp comes on. Y N Go to Flag 2 check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the SDF Document Path Sensor Q3, PL 9.3, PL 9.4.

Procedure
Clear the document jam. Open and close the SDF Feed Assembly Press the C button The jam can be cleared. Y N 1 The SDF Jam LED is flashing.

The machine is equipped with a Duplex SDF. Y N Clean and or check for the following. 1 Obstructions ~nthe paper path 2. Extt Drlve Belt, PL 9.3

1
I

/
I
GO

Enter the diagnostic code 12-21. Open and then close the SDF Feed Assembly. The SDF Misfeed indicator comes on and goes off.

1 / 1
/

3 4

Transport Roller, PL 9 3 Exlt roller, PL 9.3 )stlc code rz-51. The DSDF Transport Roll Clutch CL1, can be heard lisengaging.

Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an intermittent condition. if the problem still exists replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

I
1 I
iI

Perform the following. 1. Go to Flag 5 and check the wires for and open or short circuit. 2. 3. Check the mechanical components on the output of the Transport Roll Clutch, PL 9.4. If the problem still exists, replace the DSDF Transport Roll Clutch CLI, PL 9.4

Place a document in the SDF tray. Press the Start button. The document is fed into the document path. Y N Enter the diagnostic code [2-31. The SDF Drive Motor comes on. / I I1 Y N Go to Flag 3 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace 1 I the SDF Drive Motor, PL 9.3, PL 9.4. j I

to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the SDF Document Path Sensor Q3, PL 9.3, PL 9.4.

Enter the diagnostic code [2-61.The DSDF Exit Pinch Rolls pulse up and down. Y N Perform the following. 1. Go to Flag 6 and check the wires for and open or short circuit. 1 2. Check the mechanical linkage on the output of the DSDF Exit Roll Solenoid, PL 9.4.

I I

/I

3.

If the problem still exists, replace the DSDF Exit Roll Solenoid SOL 2, PL 9.4

I
I

/'

II
I

Enter the diagnostic code [2-41. The SDF Feed Solenoid cycles on and off. Y N Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the SDF Feed Solenoid SOL1, PL 9.2.

i
I

1
1
j

~ w ~ t off c hthe power Remove the SDF Rear Cover and check the SDF Drlve Motor and dr~ve components for wear and or damage. The Motor and drive components are good. Y N Replace the defective components PL 9.3, PL 9.4

Enter the diagnostic code [2-71. The DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid SOL3 moves up and down. Y N Perform the following. 1 . Go to Flag 7 and check the wires for and open or short circuit. 2. Check the mechanical linkage on the output of the DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid SOL3, PL 9.4. I If the problem still exists, replace the DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid SOL3, PL9.4. 3. /

ii
I

Check the followmg for wear and or damage PL 9 3. Feed solenotd llnkage PL 9.2
*

Clean and or check for the following: 1. Obstructions in the paper path 2. Exit Drive Belt, PL 9.4 3. 4. Transport Roller, PL 9.4 Exit roller, PL 9.4

Feed and Retard rolls PL 9.2 Feed Clutch and drlve PL 9 2

iI

The document stops before the Exit roller. Y N Clean and check the document path for obstructtons

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES

A1/A2 Status Code RAP

manuals4you.com

IPL7.1
PL 9 2 Docuineiit In SDF Tray

12-*1
BLU

PiJ52

I i \ +RVnc
,-I

>

, , .

I !
[ ]

SDF Feed Solenoid On L)+X"DC

P,JZ

I I

1 7; e
12-21
Documeiit at SDF Documnet Path Sensor 0 3 (1) +5 VDC BRN

1 2 VDC

RED

Document Cover Closed Sensor

/
DC COM GRY

SDF Sensor

SDF Feed Solenoid SOL 1

SDF Dociimeilt Path Sensor

'OTE

SIGNAL READS APPROXIMATELY 22-C TO GND WHEN THE MOTOR IS OPERATING

Figure 1 A1IA2 Status Code

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

AI/A2 Status Code RAP

Workcentre XD SERIES

r------------------------------------------------------------------------

I (MACHINES WITH DUPLEX SDF ONLY) I


ivlPSi\i PWB PL71
DSDF TRANSPORT ROLL CLUTCH CL1 DSDF Transport Roll Clutch CN1
I

I I

I
I
I

16

I
I

15

RED

I I I I
I

+?4 VDC
I

DSDF Deflectlon Gate Solenold SOL3 DSOF Exit Roll Solenoid SOL2

I I I I I I I I I

SDF Deflectlon Gate Solenold

DSDF DEFLECTION GATE SOLENOID SOL3

pij~q

DSDF Transport Roll Clutch CL1 (uiicier SOL?)

_1-+?4 VDC

Figure 2 DSDF Drive Components

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

AI/A2 Status Code RAP


manuals4you.com

CH Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


The Main PWB sensed that the Toner Cartridge is not present or fully seated.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

CH Status Code RAP (With SDF)


The Main PWB sensed that the Toner Cartridge is not present or fully seated.

lnitial Actions
Ensure that the 2 locating pins on the rear of the toner cartridge are not broken. Remove and reinstall the Toner Cartridge If problem st111 ex~sts, go to Flag 1 and check for a short c~rcu~t If problem st111 exists, replace the Maln PWB PL 7 1

initial Actions
Ensure that the 2 locating pins on the rear of the toner cartridge are not broken. Remove and reinstall the Toner Cartridge. If problem still exists, go to Flag 1 and check for an open or short circuit. If problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1 ..

Cartridae L O W TONE

i!
I
TONER CARTRIDGE PlJ9

DCCOM GRY

{%
MAlN PWB

TONER CARTRIDGE PIJ9

MAlN PWB
CNll

REAR VIEW REAR VIEW

Figure 1 Toner Cartridge Installed (With SDF) Figure 1 Toner Cartridge installed (Without SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

CH Status Gode RAP, GH Status Gode RAP

VVorkCentre XD SERIES

C1 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


The Main PWB sensed that the Side Door is open.
MOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

C1 Status Code RAP (With SDF)


The Main PWB sensed that the Side Door is open.

Procedure
Ensure that the S~de Door IS closed securely. There is +24 VDC measured at CN103-2 o n the Main PWB to GND. Y PI I There is 924 VDG measured at GN103-11 t o GNB. ) Y M I Replace the Maln PWB PL 7 1 I I Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the check is good replace the Side I Door Detector Switch Assembly PL 5.3.

Procedure
Ensure that the Side Door is closed securely. There is +24 VDC measured at the Main PWB t o GND. Y N 1 There is +24 VDC measured art CN107-1 t o GND. i Y N ! Replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.
1
8 8

6N107-2 on

I
I
3

j
I

Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the check is good replace the Side Door Detector Switch Assembly PL 5.3.

Replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.

Replace the Main PWB PL 7.1

SlDE DOOR INTERLOCK 5 3 PL 5 3


I
I

RED

% , ' A

RED

Figure 1 +24 VDC Interlock Ckt. (With SDF) Figure 1 +24 VDC Interlock Ckt. (Without SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES

C1 Status Code RAP, C 1 Status Code RAP manuals4you.com

E2 Status Code (Without SDF) RAP


The Main PWB sensed a tray misfeed or a paper jam in the paper path

'

1 I

N Replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.

NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main P WB connector numbers.

1 I

I
Go to Flag 6 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Registration Roll Solenoid SOL3, PL 2.2.

initial Actions
Switch off the power and clear any document jam. Check for any obstructions in the paper path.

Press the Stop button Paper jams in the fuser. Y N I Check the followtng Ensure that the paper tray gu~de IS set to the correct wldth of the copy paper I

Procedure
Switch on the power. Enter diagnostic code [30-I]. Open then close the Fuser Gate to actuate and deactuate the Fuser Jam Sensor Q3 while observing the Paper Jam lamp. The Paper Jam lamp comes on and goes off. Y N Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Fuser Jam Sensor Q3 PL 6.1.

1
I

lnspect the paper path from thls tray and the paper regtstratton area for an obstructlon such as a burr lnspect the Reglstrat~on Roll, PL 5 1 and the Plnch Roll, PL 1 4 for contamrnat~on and wear. Clean (wlth F~lm Remover only) or replace as requlred Check the condition of the Pressure Sprlngs, PL 1 4 to ensure that they are applylng even tens~on

Manually actuate and deactuate the Paper Feed Sensor Q1 while observing the Toner Cartridge lamp. The Toner Cartridge lamp comes on and goes off. Y N Go to Flag 1 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Paper Feed Sensor Q1 PL 5.1. For machines with a Tray 2. Open the Lower Side Door and manually actuate the Tray 2 Feed Sensor Q7. The Tray 2 LED goes off and comes on. Y N / Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Tray 2 Feed Sensor Q7, PL 5.8.

Check the following: A deformed Pressure Roller, PL 6.2. An obstruction in the Fuser.

A binding Registration Roll Solenoid, PL 2.2. A broken Fuser Drive Gear, PL 6.1 and PL 2.2
A broken or dislocated tray 2 Arm, PL 5.7

1I
1

Place a piece of paper above the Fuser Gate and use the Manual Exit Knob to move the paper across the Exit Sensor 0 4 while observing the Drum Cartridge Lamp. The Drum Cartridge lamp turns on and off. Y N Go to Flag 5 and check for an open or short wire. If the wires are good, replace the Exit 1 Sensor Q4 PL 6.3.

CN104

i
Manually actuate and deactuate the Single Sheet Bypass Feed Sensor Q2 while observing the Auto exposure lamp. The Auto exposure LED comes on and goes off. Y N I Go to Flag 3 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Single Sheet I Bypass Feed Sensor Q2 PL 5.2.

Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF)

Press the Clear button. Enter diagnostic code [6-21. Press the Start button. The Registration Roll Solenoid can be heard engaging and disengaging. Y N j Press the Clear button. There is +24 VDC measured between CN103-1 and GND on j the Main PWB.

I
"

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

E2 Status Code (Without SBF) RAP

MAIN PWB

Single Sheet Bypass Feed Sensor Q2

Paper Feed Sensor Q1

\
Tray 2 Feed Sensor 07

PNK

Figure 2 E2 Status Code (Without SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

Workcentre XD SERIES

E2 Status Code (Without SDF) RAP


manuals4you.com

. I

PNK

+24 VDC

J-

RED

P I J S
Registration Roll Solenoid SOL-3

EXIT SENSOR Q4 PL 6.3

Paper At

PNK

Exit Sensor Q4

P/J$

PC7

Figure 3 E2 Fuser and Exit Jam (Without SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

4/00

E2 Status Code (Without SDF) RAP

2-1o

Workcentre XD SERIES

NlAiN PWB PL71

Duplex SDF Only)

Figure 2 E2 Fuser and Exit jams

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES

E2 Status Code RAP (With SDF)


manuals4you.com

E7-[Ol] Status Code RAP


The Main PWB sensed a GDI Memory PWB error.

E7-LO31 Status Code RAP (Without SBF)


The Main PWB sensed a Laser Output error.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

Procedure
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[01] Status Code still exists. Y N Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.

Procedure
Switch off the power. Ensure that the Side Door is closed securely. Switch on the power. The E7-1031 Status Code still exists. V N i Run several coples to ensure the problem does not reoccur.

I
Switch off the power. Disconnect the power cord. Check for a loose or intermittent connection of the GDI Memory PWB to CN108 on the Main PWB. Reconnect the power cord and switch on the power. The E7-[01] Status Code still exists. V N Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.

/1

Replace the GDI Memory PWB PL 7.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.

There is +5 VDC measured from CN107-3 to GND V N 1 There is +5 VDC measured from CN107-4 to GND. i! V N I 1 Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

1
MAIN PWB

b o to Flag 1. Check the The wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Side Door Interlock Switch S4, PL 5.3.

ONLY)

Perform the following: * Check the connector CN115 on the Main PWB and the Laser Harness PL 3.2 to the Laser Module for an open or intermittent condition. If the connections and wires are good replace the Laser Module, PL 3.3.
If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

G D I NIeinoiy P

W ~

CNlOS

Figure 1 GDI Memory PWB

SIDE DOOR INTERLOCK S4

Wi3

3~

ORN

11 I

+5VDC

CNll

CN107

Figure 1 Side door interlock SW.

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

E7-[Ol] Status Code RAP, E7-[03] Status Code RAP

4/00 2-14

Workcentre XD SERIES

E2 Status Code RAP (With SDF)


The Main PWB sensed a tray misfeed or a paper jam in the paper path.

Go to Flag 6 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Registration Roll Solenoid SOL3, PL 2.2.

initial Actions

1
1

Sw~tch off the power and clear any document jam Check for any obstructions in the paper path.

Procedure
Switch on the power. Enter d~agnostic code [30-11. Open then close the Fuser Gate to actuate and deactuate the Fuser Jam Sensor Q3 whlle observing the Paper Jam lamp. The Paper Jam lamp comes on and goes off. Y N 1 Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Fuser Jam Sensor Q3 PL 6.1. Manually actuate and deactuate the Paper Feed Sensor Q1, while observing the Toner Cartr~dge lamp. The Toner Cartridge lamp comes on and goes off. Y N Go to Flag 1 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Paper Feed j Sensor Ql PL 5.1.

Press the Stop button. Paper jams in the fuser. Y M i Check the following: Ensure that the paper tray guide is set to the correct width of the copy paper. Inspect the paper path from this tray and the paper registration area for an obstruction such as a burr. I Inspect the Registration Roll, PL 5.1 and the Pinch Roll, PL 1.4 for contamination j 1 and wear. Clean (with Film Remover only) or replace as required. I I Check the condition of the Registration Pinch Roll Springs, PL 1.4 to ensure that II they are applying even tension.

1 1

I
I

The machine has a duplex SDF. Y N Check the following: A deformed Pressure Roller, PL 6.2. I An obstruction in the Fuser. i! A binding Registration Roll Solenoid, PL 2.2. I A broken Fuser Drive Gear PL 6.1 and PL 2.2. 1 *

1
1

For machines with a Tray 2. Open the Lower Side Door and manually actuate the Tray 2 Feed Sensor Q7. The Tray 2 LED goes off and comes on. V N Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open or a short circuit. If the wires are good, / replace the Tray 2 Feed Sensor Q7, PL 5.8.

1
i
I
@

A defective Exit Drive Belt PL 2.1 A broken Exit Roller or Lower Transport Roller PL 2.1. A loose or broken Lower Side Door Arm PL 5.7.

Place a piece of paper above the Fuser Gate and use the Manual Exit Knob to move the paper across the Exit Sensor Q4 while observing the Drum Cartridge Lamp. The Drum Cartridge lamp turns on and off. V N Go to Flag 5 and check for an open or short circuit.If the wires are good, replace the Exit I Sensor Q4 PL 6.3.

Press the Start button. Both the Main Drive Motor and Enter the diagnostic code [25-I]. the Exit Drive Motor come on. V N Press the Stop button. Go to Flag 7 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Exit Drive Motor MOT5 PL 2.1. I

Check the following: A deformed Pressure Roller, PL 6.2. * An obstruction in the Fuser. A binding Registration Roll Solenoid, PL 2.2.

Manually actuate and deactuate the Single Sheet Bypass Feed Sensor Q2 wh~le observing the Auto exposure lamp. The Auto exposure LED comes on and goes off. Y M a Go to Flag 3 and check for an open circuit If the wires are good, replace the Single Sheet I Bypass Sensor Q2 PL 5.2.

A broken Fuser Drive Gear PL 6.1 and PL 2.2.


A broken Exit Roller or Lower Transport Roller PL 2.1. A defective Exit Drive Belt PL 2.1.

RegistraPress the Clear button Enter d~agnostic code [6-21Press the Start button. The tion Roll Solenoid can be heard engaging and disengaging. N Y Press the Clear button. There is +24 VBC measured between CNI07-I and GND on I i the Main PWB.
Replace the M a ~ n PWB PL 7 1

*-

h .

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS WorkCentre XD SERIES

E%Status Code RAP (With SDF)


manuals4you.com

S~ngle Sheet Bypass Feed rQ2

Paper At Bypass

Paper Feed Sensor Q I

Tray 2 Feed Sensor Q7

Figure 1 E2 Status Code (with SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

E2 Status Code RAP (With SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

E7-[03] Status Code RAP (With SDF)


The Main PWB sensed a Laser Output error.

E7-[04] Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


The Main PWB senses a CCD white level error.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

Procedure
Swttch off the power Ensure that the Side Door IS closed securely. Swltch on the power. The E7-[03] Status Code still exists. Y N I Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.

Procedure
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-1041 Status Code still exists. Y N Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.

i
There is +5 VDC measured from CN103-3 to GND. Y N There is +5 VDC measured from CN103-4 to GND. l Y N I Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

I
!

;
1 1

I I

Go to Flag 1. Check the The wires for an open c~rcuit If the wires are good, replace the S~de Door Interlock Switch S4, PL 5.3

Check the connector CN121 on the Main PWB and the ribbon cable going to the CCD PWB for an open or intermittent condition. If the connections are good replace the LensJCCD Module PL 3.2. If the problem still exists, replace the Exposure Lamp Carriage PL 3.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.

Perform the following: Check the connector CN119 on the Main PWB and the Laser Harness PL 3.2 to the Laser Module for an open or intermittent condition. If the connections and wires are good replace the Laser Module, PL 3.3. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

SIDE DOOR INTERLOCK S4 PLII

I
ORN

l p L I l I
MAIN PWB

3~

ICN103 +SVDC

Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF)

CNll

Workcentre XD SERIES

4/00 2-1 5

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

E7-6033 Status Code RAP, E7-[04] Status Code RAP

manuals4you.com

E7-1041 Status Code RAP (With SDF)


The Main PWB senses a CCD white level error.

E7-[05] Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


The Main PWB sensed a CCD black level error.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

Procedure
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[04] Status Code still exists. Y N i Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.
I

Procedure
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The 7-[05] Status Code still exists. Y N Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur. Check the connector CN121 on the Main PWB and the r~bbon cable going to the CCD PWB for an open or Intermittent cond~t~on. If the connections are good replace the LensICCD Module PL 3 2 If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7 1.

Check the connector CN121 on the Main PWB and the ribbon cable going to the CCD PWB for an open or intermittent condition. If the connections are good replace the LensICCD Module PL 3.2. If the problem still exists, replace the Exposure Lamp Carriage PL 3.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.

CNl I

MAIN PWB ONLY)

"

Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF) Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

E7-1041 Status Code RAP, E7-[05] Status Code RAP

4/00 2-16

Workcentre XD SERIES

E7-1851Status Code RAP (With SDF)


The Main PWB sensed a CCD black level error.

E7-[I21 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


The Main PWB sensed a CCD shading level error.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

Procedure
Sw~tch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[05] Status Gode still exists. V N / Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur. PWB and the ribbon cable going to the CCD PWB Check the connector CN124 on the M a ~ n condition for an open or lnterm~ttent If the connections are good replace the LensJCCD Module PL 3 2. If the problem stdl exlsts, replace the Maln PWB PL 7 1

Procedure
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[12] Status Code still exists. V N Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.

Check the connector CN121 on the Main PWB and the ribbon cable going to the CCD PWB for an open or intermittent condition. If the connections are good replace the LensICCD Module PL 3.2. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.

MAIN PWB

I , n

ONLY)

I"," B-

.-i
I

.-.-.-.-. ,

. ,

--

Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF) Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

4/00 2-17

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

E7-6051 Status Code RAP (With SDF), E7-1121Status

manuals4you.com

E7-1121 Status Code RAP (With SDF)


The Main PWB sensed a CCD shading level error.

E7-[I 41 Status Code RAP


The Main PWB sensed an ASIC communication error.

Procedure
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[I21Status Code still exists. V N I Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur. Check the connector CN124 on the Main PWB and the ribbon cable going to the CCD PWB for an open or intermittent condition. If the connections are good replace the LensICCD Module PL 3.2. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.

Procedure
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[14] Status Code still exists. V N / Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur. I

Replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.

Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

E7-[I21 Status Code RAP (With SDF), E7-[I41 Status

4/00 2-18

E7-[I51Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


The Main PWB sensed a Copy Lamp problem. NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct M a ~ n PWB connector numbers.

E7-[I51Status Code RAP (With SDF)


The Main PWB sensed a Copy Lamp problem.

Procedure
Enter the diagnostic code [l-I]. Press the Start button. When the Exposure Carriage is approximately half way through the scan, press the Stop button. Check that the mirrors on the Exposure Lamp Carriage and the Half Rate Carriage are not broken or out of position. The mirrors are good. V N Replace the defective Component, PL 3.1. Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[I51 Status Code still exists. Y N Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.

Procedure
Enter the diagnostrc code [l-I]. Press the Start button. When the Exposure Carriage is approx~matelyhalf way through the scan, press the Stop button Check that the mirrors on the Exposure Lamp Carriage and the Half Rate Carriage are not broken or out of posit~onThe mirrors are good. Y N I Replace the defective Component, PL 3 1
I I

Swrtch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[15] Status Code still exists. Y N Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur. Check the connector CN118 on the Main PWB and the ribbon cable going to the Exposure Lamp Carriage PL 3.1, for an open or intermittent condition. If the cable is good, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Exposure Lamp Carriage PL 3.1

1i

Check the connector CN121 on the Main PWB and the ribbon cable going to the Exposure Lamp Carriage PL 3.1, for an open or intermittent condition. If the cable is good, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Exposure Lamp Carriage PL 3.1.

Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF) Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF)

VIIorkCentre XD SERIES

4/00 2-19

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

E7-[I51Status Code RAP (Without SDF), E7-[I51

manuals4you.com

H21H3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


H2, indicates that the Main PWB sensed a fuser overheat condition (Thermistor RTI open). H3, indicates that the Main PWB sensed a fuser overheat condition.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

Procedure
The Status Code is an, H3.

N
Go to Flag 1 and check for an open wire. If the wires are good replace the Thermistor RTI, PL 6.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. If the problem continues, replace the Power Supply PWB, PL 7.1.

Connect the meter between CN109-17 (+) on the Main PWB and GND (refer to Flag 4) There is 1.2 VDC present while an H3 status code is displayed.

K
I

N
NOTE: An H3/H4 status code must be cleared in diagnostics before the copier becomes operational again.

1
I

Enter Diagnostic code 14 to clear the H3 status code. Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The H3 status code appears within 5 seconds after power on.

I1 Y I N
I

The Ventilation Fan Motor MOT3 is running. Go to the 4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (Without SDF).

/
8

II

Go to Flag 1 and check the Thermistor circuit for a short circuit to ground. If OK, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

i
'

Check the Thermistor RTI, PL 6.1 for contamination. If OK, replace the Power Supply PWB PSl, PL 7.1.

Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. If problem still exists, replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1.

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

HaH3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

Figure 1 Fuser Heat (Without SDF)

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES
2-21

STATUS lNDlCATOR RAPS

H2/H3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)

manuals4you.com

H2JH3 Status Code RAP (With SDF)


H2, indicates that The Main PWB sensed a fuser overheat condition (that the thermistor RTl was open). H3, indicates that the Main PWB sensed a fuser overheat condition.

Procedure
The Status Code is an, H3. Y N Go to Flag 1 and check for an open wire. If the wires are good replace the Thermistor RT1, PL 6.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. If the problem continues, replace the Power Supply PWB, PL 7.1.

I
I

Connect the meter between CN101-17 (+) on the Main PWB and GND (refer to Flag 4). There is 1.2 VDC present while an H3 status code is displayed. Y N

NOTE: An H3/H4 status code must be cleared in diagnostics before the copier becomes operational again. Enter Diagnostic code 14 to clear the H3 status code. Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The H3 status code appears within 5 seconds after power on. Y N The Ventilation Fan Motor MOT3 is running. / Y N Go to the 4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (With SDF).

/
%

;heck the Thermistor RT1, PL 6.1 for contamination. If OK, replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1.

1 !

Go to Flag 1 and check the Thermistor circuit for a short circuit to ground. If OK, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. If problem still exists, replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1.

STATUS lNDlCATOR RAPS

4/00

H21H3 Status Code RAP (With SDF)

2-22

Workcentre XD SERIES

Fuser Power On

HZ = THERMISTOR IS OPEN H3 = FUSER OVERHEATS 1-14 = FUSER DOES NOT WARPA UP WITHIN 27 SECONDS. WHEN AN H OR L STATUS CODE IS PRESENT, THE POWER RELAY SiGNAi GOES HIGH REMOVING POWER TO THE FUSER

ACH = 115 VAC (60HZ) = 2201240 VAC (501

JUO
r2

MAIN P W B

[wimror
ONLY)

CZzJ

F U B 9 . .

Figure 1 Fuser heat (With SDF)

WorkCentre XD SERIES

4/00 2-23

H21H3 Status Code RAP (With SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

manuals4you.com

H4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


The Main PWB sensed that the fuser did not reach 185" C within 27 seconds after power on or that the fuser dropped below 140" C for 6 seconds during the copy cycle.
NOTE: An H3/H4 status code must be cleared in diagnostics before the copier becomes operational again. NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

Procedure
Switch off the Power. Disconnect the connector, PlJ6 from the Fuser assembly. Connect the meter on the machine side P/J6 between pins 1 and 2 (refer to Flag 3). Set the multimeter to measure AC. Enter diagnostic code [5-21. When the Start button is pressed the machine input line voltage is measured for approximately 5 seconds. V N Reconnect connector PIJ6. Press the Stop button. Connect the DC Meter between I CN109-16 and GND. Press the Start button. The meter switches from +24 VDC to O VDC for 5 seconds. ' Y N Go to Flag 2 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. The wire is good.

1
1I
I

Repair the wire or replace the DC harness, PL 7.1.


I

Replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1

'

/I

I
Replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1

Connect the meter between CN109-17 (+) on the Main PWB and GND (refer to Flag 4). Enter diagnostic code [14]. There is approximately 1.2 VDC present. V N I Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. If problem still exists, replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1.

1
I

Switch off the power. Set the multimeter to the 200 ohm range. Measure the Fuser side of the connector PlJ6 between pins 1 and 2. There is 1.7 ohms + or - 0.5 ohms measured between pins 1 and 2 of PIJ 6. V N Remove the Fuser Assembly. Check the continuity of the Thermostat and the Heat Rod I
I

N Replace the defective component, PL 6.1.

Reinstall the Fuser Assembly. If the problem still exists, replace the Fuser Assembly, PL

Reconnect PlJ6. Switch on the power. If the problem still exists, replace the Power Supply PWB PS1, PL 7.1.

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

H4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)

BLK

VIO

BLK

0
@

HZ = THERMISTOR IS OPEIN H3 = FUSER OVERHEATS H4 = FUSER DOES NOT WARM UP WITHIN 27 SECONDS. WHEN AN H OR L STATUS CODE IS PRESENT, THE POWER RELAY SIGNAL GOES HIGH REMOVING POWER TO THE FUSER

ACH = 115 VAC (60HZ) = 220D40 VAC O ) , H ,

Figure 1 Fuser Heat (Without SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

H4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)

manuals4you.com

H4 Status Code RAP (With SDF)


The Main PWB sensed that the fuser did not reach 185" C within 27 seconds after power on or that the fuser dropped below 140" C for 6 seconds during the copy cycle.

NOTE: An H3/H4 status code must be cleared in diagnostics before the copier becomes operational again.

Procedure
Switch off the Power. Disconnect the connector, PIJ6 from the Fuser assembly. Connect the meter on the machine side PIJ6 between pins 1 and 2 (refer to Flag 3). Set the multimeter to measure AC. Enter diagnostic code [5-21. When the Start button is pressed the machine input line voltage is measured for approximately 5 seconds. Y N Reconnect connector PlJ6. Press the Stop button. Connect the DC Meter between CN101-16 and GND. Press the Start button. The meter switches from +24 VDC to O / VDC b r 5 seconds. V N Go to Flag 2 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. The wire is good.

Repair the wire or replace the DC harness, PL 7.1.

1I
3

Replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1


I
6

Connect the meter between CN101-17 (+) on the Main PWB and GND (refer to Flag 4). Enter diagnostic code [14]. There is approximately 1.2 VDC present. Y N II Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. If problem still exists, replace the Power Supply PWB i PSI, PL 7.1.

Replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1.

I
Switch off the power. Set the multimeter to the 200 ohm range. Measure the Fuser side of the connector PlJ6 between pins 1 and 2. There is 1.7 ohms + or - 0.5 ohms measured between pins 1 and 2 of PIJ 6. Y N Remove the Fuser Assembly. Check the continuity of the Thermostat and the Heat Rod 1 HTRl . The checks are good. Y N Replace the defective component, PL 6.1.

1
1
j

I
Reinstall the Fuser Assembly. If the problem still exists, replace the Fuser Assembly, PL

Reconnect PlJ6. Switch on the power. If the problem still exists, replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1.

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

H4 Status Code RAP (With SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

CNlOl

Figure 1 Fuser Heat (With SDF)

STATUS INDlCATOR RAPS

Workcentre XB SERIES

H4 Status Code RAP (With SDF)


manuals4you.com

J1 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


J 1, Indicates that the Toner Cartridge is empty.

NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

lnitial Actions
Replace the Toner Cartridge. If a problem still exists, continue with the procedure. NOTE: If the customer complains that the toner cartridge reached its end of life too soon, then instruct the customer that making copies with the document cover open or making copies with high image area coverage, such as photographs, will reduce the life of the toner cartridge.

Procedure
Enter diagnostic code [lo]. The Toner Motor comes on. Y N Press Clear. Set the meter to measure. Connect the meter between CNIOI-1 (+) and CN101-2 (-) on the Main PWB. I Press Start. There is approximately +22 VAC present.

I
I
//
i

Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. Go to Flag 1 and check for an open. If the wires are good, replace the Toner Motor MOT4, PL 2.1.

Switch off the power. Connect the meter between, CN113-2 on the Main PWB (+) and chassis (-). Switch the power on. There is a steady +5 VDC present. Y N Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

Perform the following: Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit. Check for a mechanical drive problem to the Toner Cartridge Replace the Toner Cartridge, PL 8.2.

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

J1 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

MAlN PWB PL 7.1 TONER CARTRIDGE PL 8.2

+5 VDC

MOT 4

C = l B

ne
MAIN

TONER CARTRIDGE PIJ9

loTEs:

REAR VIEW

THE TONER MOTOR IS ACTUATED WHEN LOWTONER CONCENTRATION IS SENSED B Y THE LOWTONER SENSOR. IF THE MOTOR RUNS FOR 120 SECONDS AND THE LOW TONER SIGNAL IS STILL HIGH. THE TONER CARTRIDGE LAMP WILL FLASH.

Figure 1 J1 Status Code (Without SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

J1 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


manuals4you.com

41 Status Code RAP (With SDF)


J 1, Indicates that the Toner Cartridge is empty

initial Actions
Replace the Toner Cartridge. If a problem still exists, continue with the procedure

NOTE: If the customer complains that the toner cartridge reached its end of life too soon, then instruct the customer that making copies with the document cover open or making copies with high image area coverage, such as photographs, will reduce the life of the toner cartridge.

Procedure
Enter diagnostic code [lo]. The toner motor comes on. Y N Press Clear. Set the meter to measure. Connect the meter between CN105-1 (+) and CN105-2 (-) on the Main PWB Press Start. There is approximately +22 VAG present. Y N Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. 1 I t

//

GO

to Flag 1 and check for an open. If the wires are good, replace the Toner Motor MOT4, PL 2.1.

Switch off the power. Connect the meter between, CN112-2 on the Main PWB (+) and chassis (-). Switch the power on. There is a steady +5 VDC present. Y N Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

Perform the following: Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit. Check for a mechanical drive problem to the Toner Cartridge. Replace the Toner Cartridge, PL 8.2.

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

J1 Status Code RAP (With SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

Toner Dispense

MOT 4

TONER CARTRIDGE PIJ9


MAIN PWB

REAR VIEW NOTES:

THE TONER MOTOR IS ACTUATED WHEN LOW TONER CONCENTRATION IS SENSED BY THE LOWTONER SENSOR. IF THE MOTOR RUNS FOR 120 SECONDS AND THE LOWTONER SIGNAL IS STILL HIGH, THE TONER CARTRIDGE LAMP WILL FLASH.

Figure 1 J1 Status Code (With SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS WorkCentre XD SERIES

%"Itatus Code RAP (With SDF)

manuals4you.com

J2 Status Code RAP


J2, indicates the Drum Cartridge has reached the end of its life

initial Actions
Replace the Drum Cartridge with a new, not used, Drum Cartridge. If a problem still exists, continue with the procedure.

Procedure
There is less than 0.5 VDC measured between CN116-2 and GND on the Main PWB. Y N Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the / Drum Cartridge Reset Switch, PL 5.1.

Actuate the Drum Cartridge Reset Switch. There is +5 VDC measured between CN116-2 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Drum Cartridge Reset Switch, PL 5.1. I If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

S,~itch

Figure 2 Drum Cartridge Reset Switch

CONTROL
CONSOLE

MAIN PLVB
+5 VDC

Colitrol Console Harness

1
2
I

CM116

DRUNI

Figure 1 Drum Cartridge Reset circuit

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

52 Status Code RAP

This page intentally left blank

STATUS lNDlCATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES

52 Status Code RAP manuals4you.com

L1/L3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


L1, indicates that the Main PWB sensed that the carriage did not leave home after power up or after start is pressed.
L3, indicates that the Main PWB sensed that the carriage did not return home after power up or after the copy cycle. NOTE: Ensure that the shipping screw was removed at install. NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

A I Press the Clear button Remove the r~ght cover to gain access to the Scan Cable Dr~ve Shaft, PL3 1 Manually rotate the Scan Cable Drive Shaft to pos~t~on the carnage off the home position Enter d~agnostlc code [I-11 The Drum Cartridge lamp is off. Y N Go to Flag 2 and check for an open clrcult If the wires are good, replace the Scan Home

If the problem continues, replace the Maln PWB, PL 7 1

Check the following for wear or damage PL 3.1: Ribbon Cable connection to CN120 on the Main PWB Scan Drive GearIPulley * Scan Drive Belt Scan cables

Procedure
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The lamp carriage is in or moves to the home position. Y N Remove the right cover to gain access to the scan shaft. Manually rotate the scan shaft to position the carriage in the home position. Connect the meter to, CN122-2 and GND. I There is +5 VDC measured. Y N j Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Scan Home Sensor Q5, PL 3.2.

/ I

The components are good. Y N I Repair and or replace the defective components PL 3.1, PL 3.2.

I
I

If the problem still exists, replacing the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

i1
I

1
1
1I

Move the carriage off the home position. The meter reads LOW. Y N 1 Replace the Scan Home Sensor 05, PL 3.2. Go to the next step.

!
I

There is 4-5VDC measured between, CN122-2 on the Main PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Scan Home Sensor Q5, PL 3.2.

Enter diagnostic code [I-I]. Press the Start button twice. The carriage moved. Y N I Connect the meter between, CN120-1 (+) on the Main PWB and GND (-). There is +Z4 VDC measured. Y N Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. j

I t

Check the following for wear or damage, PL 3.1: Scan Drive GearIPulley Scan Drive Belt Scan cables The components are good.

v
/
/
1
. s

N Replace the defective components, PL 3.1.

Go to Flag 1 and check the connection on CN120 on the Main PWB. If the connection is good replace the Scan Drive Motor MOT2, PL 3.1.
-

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

lbl/b3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)

+5 VDC

'-Y

SCAN HOME Scan Home Sensor Q5

+24 VDC

RIBBON

NOTE

STEP 0 THRU STEP 3 StGNALS ARE APPROXIMATELY 13 2 2 0 5VDC TO GND. WHEN MOTOR IS OPERATING

Figure 1 Scan Drive Circuit

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES

Ll/L3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


manuals4you.com

a
blfL3 Status Code RAP (With SDF)
~ 1indicates , that the ~ a i PWB n sensed that the carriage did not leave home after Power up Or after start is pressed.
press the Clear button. Remove the right cover to gain access to the Scan Cable Drive Shaft, PL 3.1. Manually rotate the Scan Cable Drive Shaft to position the carriage off the home position. Enter diagnostic code [I-I]. The Drum Cartridge lamp is off. Y N Go to Flag 2 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Scan Home Sensor 0 5 . PL 3.2. If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

L3, indicates that the Main PWB sensed that the carriage did not return home after power up or after the copy cycle.
NOTE: Ensure that the shipping screw was removed at mstall.

Procedure
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The lamp carriage is in or moves to the home position. Y N 1 Remove the right cover to gain access to the scan shaft. Manually rotate the scan shaft to / position the carriage in the home position. Connect the meter to, CN125-2 and GND. There is +5 VDC measured. N Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Scan Home Sensor Q5, PL 3.2.

Check the following for wear or damage PL 3.1 : Ribbon Cable connection to CN122 on the Main PWB Scan Drive GearJPulley * Scan Drive Belt Scan cables The Components are good. Y N Repair and or replace the defective components PL 3.1, PL 3.2.

If the problem still exists, replacing the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

off the home position. The meter reads LOW. the Scan Home Sensor Q5, PL 3.2.

Go to the next step.

There is +5 VDC measured between, CN125-2 on the Main PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Scan Home Sensor Q5, PL 3.2.

1
I
j

Enter dragnostic code [I-11. Press the Start button twice. The carriage moved. Y N Connect the meter between, CN122-1 (+) on the Main PWB and GND (-). There is +24 VDC measured. Y N Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. Check the following for wear or damage, PL 3.1 : Scan Drive GearIPulley Scan Drive Belt Scan cables The components are good. Y N Replace the defective components, PL 3.1. /
I

Go to Flag 1 and check the connection on CN122 on the Main PWB. If the connection is good replace the Scan Drive Motor MOT2, PL 3.1.

1'

A STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

L1/L3 Status Code RAP (With SDF)

4/00 2-36

Workcentre XD SER~ES

Scan Home Sensor


Q5

SCAN HOME

RIBBON CABLE

Figure 1 LllL3 Status Code (With SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

4/00 2-37

L"B/L3 Status Code RAP (With SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

manuals4you.com

L4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


The Main PWB sensed a Main Drive Motor MOT1 problem.
n w
0

NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

initial Actions
Clear any jams in the paper path and ensure that the Side Door is closed.

Procedure
Enter diagnostic code [25-11. THe main motor comes on. Y N I Press the Clear button. Check the Ribbon Cable connection to CN114 on the Main PWB. The connection and the Ribbon Cable from the Main Drive Motor MOT3 are 1 good. I Y N Repair or replace the Main Drive Ribbon Cable, PL 2.2.

Figure 1 Main PWB

/1
i

1
Switch off the power. The housing of the Main Drive Motor can be turned by hand. Y N Check for a mechanical problem such as binding or broken gears or a binding drum cartridge. Repair and or replace as necessary PL 2.2. i

11 1
1

Switch on the power. Connect the meter from CN114 pin 1 and GND and pin 2 and GND on the Main PWB. There is +24 VDC present. Y N Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

1
I

Connect the meter to CN1 pin 1 and GND and pin 2 and GND on the Main Drive Motor There is +24 VDC present. Y N I Replace the Main Drive Ribbon Cable, PL 2.2.

Press Start. The voltage decreases to approximately 10 to 14 VDC.

Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

If the problem still exists, replace the Main Drive Motor MOT1, PL 2.2. If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
Check for a mechanical problem such as binding or broken gears or a binding drum cartridge Repairlreplace as necessary, PL 2.2. If the problem still exists, replace the Main Drive Motor MOT1, PL 2.2

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

L4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

L4 Status Code RAP (With SDF)


The Main PWB sensed a Main Drive Motor MOTl problem.

initial Actions
Clear any jams in the paper path and ensure that the Side Door IS closed.
CNl I

Procedure
Enter diagnostic code [25-I]. The main motor comes on. Y N Press the Clear button. Check the Ribbon Cable connection to CN113 on the Main PWB. The connection and the Ribbon Cable from the Main Drive Motor MOTl are good. V N / Repair or replace the Main Drive Ribbon Cable, PL 2.2. Sw~tch off the power The housing of the Main Drive Motor can be turned by hand. N Check for a mechanical problem such as binding or broken gears or a bindlng drum carfr~dgeRepair and or replace as necessary PL 2.2 Switch on the power. Connect the meter from CN113 pin 1 and GND and pin 2 and GND on the Main PWB. There is +24 VDC present. Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. I Connect the meter to CN1 pin 1 and GND and pin 2 and GND on the Main Drive Motor. There is +24 VDC present. Y N Replace the Main Drive Ribbon Cable, PL 2.2.

Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)

1 1I
I

I
j
j

I
I

Press Start. The voltage decreases to approximately 10 to 14 VDC. V N Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

In Drive Motor

MOTI

Check for a mechanical problem such as bindlng or broken gears or a blnding drum cartr~dge Repalrlreplace as necessary, PL 2.2. If the problem stdl exists, replace the M a ~ n Drlve Motor MOT1, PL 2 2

If the problem still exlsts, replace the Main Drive Motor MOTl, PL 2 2 If the problem continues, replace the Maln PWB, PL 7 1

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES

L4 Status Code RAP (With SDF) manuals4you.com

b6 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


The Main PWB sensed a Polygon motor lock signal error.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

b6 Status Code RAP (With SDF)


The Main PWB sensed a Polygon motor lock signal error.

Procedure
Enter d~agnost~c code 125-101 The Polygon Motor comes on for 30 seconds. V N Check the connector CN119 on the Maln PWB and the wrres and connectors on the 1 Laser Module. The connections and wires are good. / V N I / Replace the Laser Harness, PL 3 3

Procedure
Enter diagnostic code [25-101. The Polygon Motor comes on for 30 seconds.

V
I

N
Check the connector CN115 on the Main PWB and the wires and connectors on the Laser Module. The connections and wires are good. Y N Replace the Laser Harness, PL 3.3.

1
1
j

J
I

If the problem still exists, replace the Laser Module, PL 3.3. If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

i t h e problem still exists, replace the Laser Module, PL 3.3. If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

Switch the power off. Switch the power on. If the problem still exists, replace the Laser Module, PL 3.3.

Switch the power off. Switch the power on. If the problem still exists, replace the Laser Module, PL 3.3.

Figure 1 Main PWB Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)

STATUS lNDlCATOR RAPS

L6 Status Code RAP, L6 Status Code RAP (With SBF)

4/00

2-40

WorkCentre XD SERIES

This page intentionally left blank

Workcentre XD SERIES

4/00 2-41

L6 Status Code RAP, L6 Status Code RAP (With

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

manuals4you.com

P Status Code RAP (Without SDF)


The Main PWB sensed that the selected Paper Tray is out of paper or a misfeed has occurred.

Y I

N Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1

NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Paper Feed Solenoid SOL1 PL 2,2,

initial Actions
Ensure pressure plate lock is removed from the paper tray. Ensure the side and rear paper guides are installed and that they are not too tight against the paper.

Procedure
Enter the diagnostic code [30-I]. Manually actuate and deactuate the Paper Feed Sensor Q1 while observing the Toner Cartridge lamp. The Toner Cartridge lamp turns on and off. Y N I Perform the following: Check the sensor actuator for proper operation PL 5.1.

1I

Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the checks are good, replace the Paper Feed Sensor Q1, PL 5.1.

The P status code occurs when the Main Tray is selected. Y N I The machine has a Multi Sheet Bypass Tray. I Y N Enter the diagnostic code [30-I].Place a sheet of paper into the Single Sheet Bypass tray and remove the sheet. The Auto Exposure LED comes on and goes

1 1
1

Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding. If the problem still exists, Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good replace the Single Sheet Bypass Feed Sensor Q2, PL 5.2.

Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding. Enter the diagnostic code 6-1. Connect the meter between, CN111-2 (+) on the Main PWB and ground (-). Press the Start button. The meter alternates between +24 VDC and GND.

Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding. If the problem still exists, go to Flag 3 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Multi Bypass Feed Solenoid SOL4, PL 5.5. Replace the Main PWB. PL 7 1 .

11 1

Enter the diagnostic code [6-I]. Connect the meter between CN102-2 (+) on the Main PWB and ground (-). Press the Start button. The meter alternates between +24 VDC and GND.

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

P Status Code RAP (Without SDF)

MAIN PWB

l-TL--?

PL

+5VDC

SOLENOID SOL 1 PL 2.2

I I

+5 VDC

+24 VDC
PNK

r1
I
CNlll

I
CNlll

+5 VDC

FEED SOLENOID Multi Bypass Tray

+5 VDC

+24 VDC

NOTES

0
(2a
U

Paper Feed Sensor Q l

A PAPER JAM WILL OCCUR (PAPER JAM LAMP FLASHING) I F A THE PAPER FEED SENSOR IS ACTUATED AT POWER ON B. THE PAPER FEED SENSOR DOES NOT DEACTUATE IN TIME A FLASHING " P STATUS CODE WILL BE DISPLAYED IF THE PAPER FEED SENSOR Q1 IS NOT ACTUATED IN TIME AFTER START IS PRESSED Multi Bypass Feed Solenoid SOL4

Figure 1 P Code (Without SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES

P Status Code RAP (Without SBF)


manuals4you.com

P Status Code RAP (With SDF)


The Main PWB sensed that the selected Paper Tray is out of paper or a misfeed has occurred.

1
1

Initial Actions
Ensure pressure plate lock is removed from the paper tray. Ensure the side and rear paper guides are installed and that they are not too tight against the paper.

N Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding. If the problem s t exists, go to Flag 5 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Multi Bypass Solenoid SOL 4, PL 5.5.

I
check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding, PL 5.5. Enter the d~agnostic Code 16-11and select Tray 2 Press the Start button The Tray 2 Feed Solenoid SOL2, engages and disengages several times. Y N I Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Tray 2 Soenold SOL 2, PL 5.8. I Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding, PL 5.8.

Procedure
Enter the diagnostic code 130-11. Manually actuate and deactuate the Paper Feed Sensor Q1 while observing the Toner Cartridge lamp. The Toner Cartridge LED comes on and goes off. Y N Perform the following: 1 * Check the sensor actuator for proper operation PL 5.1. Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. I If the checks are good, replace the Paper Feed Sensor Q1, PL 5.1. I

/I

1
/

Enter the diagnost~c Code [6-I] and select the M a ~ n Tray Press the Start button The Paper feed Solenoid SOLI, engages and disengages several times. Y N Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding If the problem still / exists, go to Flag 3 and check the wires for an open c~rcuit If the wires are good, replace 1 the Paper Feed Solenold SOL 1, PL 2.2

Manually actuate and deactuate the Tray 2 feed Sensor Q7 while observing the Toner Cartridge lamp. The Toner cartridge LED comes on and goes off. Y N Perform the following: Check the sensor actuator for proper operation, PL 5.8. Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the checks are good, replace the Tray 2 Paper Feed Sensor Q7, PL 5.8. The P status code occurs when using the Main Tray. Y N The P status code occurs when using Tray 2. Y N The P status code occurs when using the Multlsheet bypass Tray. Y N code [3Cl]. Place a sheet of paper into the Single Sheet tray and remove the sheet. The Auto Exposure LED comes on and goes off.

I
Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding, PL 2.2.

Il o I<
CNlll CNllO CNlOl
CNIO$

MAIN PWB ,WITHSDF


ONLY)

n l . . A
!

Figure 1 Main PWB

for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding. If the problem still exists, Go to Flag 6 and check the wires for an open circuit. If replace the Single Sheet Bypass Sensor Q2, PL 5.2. Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding.

inter the diagnostic Code 16-11and select Multi Bypass Tray. Press the Start button. The Multi Bypass Feed Solenoid SOL4, engages and disengages several times.

*.

Workcentre XD SERIES

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

P Status Code RAP (With SDF)

i
TRAY 2 FEED SOLENOID SOL 2 NOTES:

0
@

A PAPER JAM WILL OCCUR (PAPER JAM LAMP FLASHING) IF A THE PAPER FEED SENSOR IS ACTUATED AT POWER ON B THE PAPER FEED SENSOR DOES NOT DEACTUATE IN TlMlE A FLASHING "V STATUS CODE WILL BE .SPLAYED IF THE PAPER FEED SENSOR 0 1 IS NOT ACTUATED IN TIME AFTER START IS PRESSED

Mulii Bypass Feed Solenoid SOL4

Solenoid 2

Sensor Q1

Tray 2 Feed Sensor Q7

Figure 2 P Code (With SDF)

STATUS lNDlCATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES

P Status Code RAP (With SDF)


manuals4you.com

L12-[01] / U2-[04] Status Code RAP


U2-[02] indicates that the Main PWB sensed a memory failure U2-1041 indicates a that the Main PWB sensed an access error.

Drum Cartridge LED On RAP


The Drum Cartridge Lamp on steady indicates that the Drum Cartridge is near end of life.

Procedure
If the Drum Cartridge LED is still on or flashing after changing the Cartridge, go to the, J2 Status Code RAP.

Procedure
Perform the U2 Status Code Clear Procedure: * Enter the diagnostic code [16]. Press the Start button. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1

--

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

U2-[01] / U2-1041 Status Code RAP, Drum Cartridge

4/00

2-46

Workcentre XD SERIES

Toner Cartridge LED On RAP


Indicates that a low toner condition exists.

rnitial Actions
MOTE: If the customer compla~ns that the toner cartrldge reached ~ t s end of 11fetoo soon, then ~nstruct the customer that maklng cop~es wlth the document cover open or mak~ng coples w ~ t h hlgh ~mage area coverage, such as photographs, w11lreduce the 11feof the toner cartrldge

Procedure
Replace the Toner Cartr~dge, PL 8.2. If the problem stdl exlsts, go to the, J1 Status Code RAP (W~thout SDF) or the J1 Status Code RAP (W~th SDF).

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES

Toner Cartridge LED On RAP


manuals4you.com

1.1 Power OM RAP (Without SDF)


Initial Actions
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.

Ensure that input power is measured at the machine power cord.

Procedure
Switch off the power. While observ~ngthe Exposure Lamp Assembly, switch on the power. The Exposure Lamp Assembly moves. Y N j The Control Console is blank. I Y N ' 1 Go to the 2.1 Selectionilndication RAP (Without SDF).

II

There is +5 VDC measured from GN109 pin 21 and pin 22 to GND on the Main PWB. Y N ACH is measured between CN2 and CN5 on the Power Supply PWB. Y N I Go to Flag 1 and check for an open circuit.

1 I /

Switch off the power. Disconnect the power. Check Fuses F1 and F3 on the Power Supply PWB for an open circuit. The Fuses are good. Y N Replace the defective Fuse, PL 7.1. Switch on the power. The problem is I resolved. I Y N 1 I I Replace the Power Supply PWB, PL 7.1

Make several copies to ensure the problem is resolved

here is +24 VDC measured from 1OWB.


Y

I
jI

Replace the Power Supply PWB, PL 7.1. CN109 pins 7 and pin 8 to GND, on the Main

I Go to the 1.2 DC Power RAP (Without SDF).

1 I I

N Go to the 1.2 DC Power RAP (Without SDF). to the 2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF).

GO

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

1 .I Power ON RAP (Without SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

Fuser Power On

= 115 VAC (60HZ) = 2201240 VAC (50HZ)

F1

F3

Figure 1 1.1 Power On (Without SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES

1.I Power ON RAP (Without SDF)

manuals4you.com

1.1 Power On RAP (With SDF)


Initial Actions
Ensure that input power is measured at the machine power cord.

Procedure
Switch off the power. While observing the Exposure Lamp Assembly, switch on the power. The Exposure Lamp Assembly moves. Y N I The Control Console is blank. I Y N Go to the 2.1 Selection/lndication RAP (with SDF).

//

There is +5 VDC measured from CNlOl pin 21 and pin 22 to GNB on the Main PWB. Y N ACH is measured between CN2 and CN5 on the Power Supply PWB. l Y N Go to Flag 1 and check for an open circuit.

Switch off the power. Disconnect the power. Check Fuses F1 and F3 on the Power Supply PWB for an open circuit. The Fuses are good. V N Replace the defective Fuse, PL 7.1. Switch on the power. The problem is resolved. I Y N I Replace the Power Supply PWB, PL 7.1. I

/
/

i
j

Make several copies to ensure the problem is resolved.

II I

Replace the Power Supply PWB, PL 7.1

1
1

1 i

h e r e is +24 VDC measured from CNlOl pins 7 and pin 8 to GND, on the Main PWB. Y N Go to the 1.2 DC Power (With SDF). b o to the 2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF)

I Go to the 1.2 DC Power (With SDF).

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

1-1 Power On RAP (With SDF)

Fuser Power On

= 115 VAC (60HZ)

MAIN PWB

= 220/240 VAC (50HZ)

/
CNlOl

Figure 1 1.1 Power On (With SDF) STATUS INDICATOR RAPS WorkCentre XD SERIES

1.1 Power On RAP (With SDF)

manuals4you.com

1.2 DC Power RAP (Without SDF)


NOTE: Enter this RAP from the 1.1 Power ON RAP (Without SDF) only NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main P WB connector numbers.

Procedure
There is +24 VDC measured between CN109-7 and GND. V N I Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit. There is +I 2 VDC measured between CN109-19 and GND. V N I Go to Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit. There is +3.3 VDC measured between CN109-20 and GND. V N Go to Flag 3. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Power 1 Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1.

I
I
1

There is +5 VDC measured between CN109-21 and GND. Y N / Go to Flag 4. Check the wires for an open circuit.

If the problem still exists, refer to BSD, 1.2 Power Generation and Distribution (Section 7) for further DC power distribution checks. Check for an intermittent or loose connection. If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

1 . 2 DG Power RAP (Without SDF)

Workcentre XB SERIES

MAIN PWB PL71

CNll4

CNI,

I +5VDC Interlock SVJ


+5 VDC

+5V1 (DSWS)

ORN

[Notes

+24 VDC i 1 VDC +5.0 \fDC .2 VDC

Figure 1 1.2 DC Power (Without SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS WorkCentre XD SERIES

1.2 DC Power RAP (Without SDF)

manuals4you.com

1.2 DC Power (With SDF)


NOTE: Enter this RAP from the 1.1 Power On RAP (With SDF) only

Procedure
There is +24 VDC measured between CN101-7 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit. There is +12 VDC measured between CN101-19 and GRID. Y N GOto Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit.

There is 4-3.3 VDC measured between CN101-20 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 3. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Power Supply PWB PSI. PL 7.1. I

1
i

There is +5 VDC measured between CN101-21 and GND. Y N I Go to Flag 4. Check the wires for an open circuit.

II

If the problem still exists, refer to BSD, 1.2 Power Generation and Distribution (Section 7) for further DC power distribution checks. Check for an intermittent or loose connection. If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

1.2 DC Power (With SDF)

Workcentre XB SERIES

POWER SUPPLY PWB P S I

PL71

CN103

+24VDC INTLK

GENERATION

CN124 6

Notes

+24 VDC 1 VDC +5 0 VDC 2 VDC

* *

L
CN116

Figure 1 1.2 DC Power (With SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

1.2 DG Power (With SDF)

manuals4you.com

2 . 1 Selectionnndication RAP (Without SDF)


Procedure
NOTE: I f the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main P WB connector numbers.

Enter diagnostic code [ 5-11 to test the control console lamps. Diagnostic code 15-11can be entered. Y N j Go to 2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF). Press Start several times to test the control console display and lamps. All the LEDs come on for 5 seconds each time the Start button is pressed. Y N The Ready lamp lights. I I Y N Go to the 2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF).

Go to Flag 1. Check CN801 on the Control Console PWB and CN116 on the Main PWB for being properly connected to the Control Console Ribbon Cable. If defective, replace the Control Console Ribbon Cable, PL 6.3. If good, replace the Control Console PWB, PL 1.3. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. For all selection problems, go to the 2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF).

MAIN PWB

Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

2.1 Selection/lndication RAP (Without SDF)

4/00 2-56

Workcentre XD SERIES

Control Console PWB PL 1 3

Figure 2 2.1 Selectionllndicator (Without SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

4/00 2-57

2.1 Selection/lndication RAP (Without SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

manuals4you.com

2."1eleetion/lndiication RAP (with SBF)


Procedure
Enter diagnostic code [ 5-11 to test the control console lamps. Diagnostic code [5-11can be entered. Y N / Go to 2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF). Press Start several times to test the control console display and lamps. All the LEDs come on for 5 seconds each time the Start button is pressed. Y N i The Ready lamp lights.

jI
j

! !
I
1

N Go to the 2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF).

I
Go to Flag 1. Check CN801 on the Control Console PWB and CN116 on the Main PWB for being properly connected to the Control Console Ribbon Cable. If defective, replace the Control Console Ribbon Cable, PL 6.3. If good, replace the Control Console PWB, PL 1.3. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

For all selection problems, go to the 2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF)

(WITH SDF ONLY)

Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

2 . 1 Selectionnndication RAP (with SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

F l
Exposure

0
Tray 2

Figure 2 2.4 Selectionllndication (With SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES

2.1 Seleelion/indIication RAP (with SDF)

manuals4you.com

2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF)


Procedure
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
Switch power off, then on. The Ready lamp comes on or is flashing. Y N Go to Flag 1. Check connectors and the Ribbon Cable for an open circuit. Replace the Control Console Ribbon Cable. PL 6.3 if required.

1
/

Press Start button. The print cycle starts. Y N Replace the Control Console PWB, PL 1.3 If a problem still exists, replace the Control Console PWB, PL 1.3 If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

MAIN PWB (WITH SDF ONLY)

Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF)

Control Console PWB PL 1 3

Selection Control

Figure 2 2.2 Selection (Without SDF)

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES
2-61

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

2.2 Sele~tion RAP (Without S%)F)

manuals4you.com

2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF)


Procedure
Switch power off, then on. The Ready lamp comes on or is flashing. Y N Go to Flag 1. Check connectors and the Ribbon Cable for an open circuit. Replace the ! Control Console Ribbon Cable, PL 6.3 if required. I I Press Start button. The print cycle starts. Y N / Replace the Control Console PWB, PL 1.3.

If a problem still exists, replace the Control Console PWB, PL 1.3. If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

(WITH SDF ONLY)

0
I
n a I n

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

Selection Control

Figure 1 2.2 Selection (With SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES

2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF)

manuals4you.com

4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (Without SDF)


Procedure
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main P WB connector numbers. Switch off the power. Switch on the power. There is +24 VDC measured between CN119-1 on the Main PWB and GND. Y N I Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

The Ventilation Fan is operating at full speed. V N ! Replace the Ventilation Fan MOT3, PL 2.1. I Allow the machine to go into Power Saver Mode. The fan is operating at low speed. Y N There is approximately +23 VDC measured between CN119-2 on the Main PWB j and GND. J Y N 1 Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. \

keplace the Ventilation Fan MOT3. PL 2.1.

The Ventilation Fan will switch off once the machine enters the Auto Shut-off Mode. If the fan continues to operate, replace the Ventilation Fan MOT3, PL 2.1.

Figure 1 Ventilation Fan MOT3

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (Without SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (With SDF)


Procedure
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. There is +24 VDC measured between CN120-1 on the Main PWB and GND.

N
Replace the Maln PWB, PL 7.1.

/
II

The Ventilation Fan is operating at full speed. Y N I Replace the Ventllat~on Fan MOT3, PL 2 1. Allow the machine to go Into Power Saver Mode. The fan is operating at low speed. Y M There is approximately +23 VDC measured between CN120-2 on the Main PWB I and GND. / Y N 1 Replace the Maln PWB, PL 7.1.

1
I

,
!

kep~ace the Ventilation Fan MOT3, PL 2.1.

The Ventilation Fan will switch off once the machine enters the Auto Shut-off Mode. If the fan continues to operate, replace the Ventilation Fan MOT3, PL 2.1. Figure 2 Ventilation Fan MOT3

Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)

Workcentre XD SERIES

4/00 2-65

4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (With SDF)

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

manuals4you.com

5.1 SDF JAM LED RAP


initial Actions
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the
correct Main P WB connector numbers.

If the Auto Start SDF mode is desired, refer to the" Programmable Settings" procedure in (Section 6). Switch off the Power and clear any document jams. Remove any documents form the SDF

Procedure
Switch on the power. Enter the diagnostic code [2-21. Place a sheet of paper in the SDF Document Tray. The Toner Cartridge LED comes on. Y N Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, check the Set 1 Detect Actuator, PL 9.2 for wear or damage. If the problem still exists, replace the SDF Sensor PWB, PL 9.2.

1I
/
I

Open and then close the SDF Feed Assembly. The SDF Jam LED comes on and goes off. Y N I Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the SDF Sensor PWB, PL 9.2.
i

Exit the Diagnostic Mode. Remove paper from the SDF Document Tray. With the machine in the Ready condition insert a sheet of paper into the SDF Document Tray. The SDF Selected LED comes on. Y N 1 The SDF Jam LED comes on or is flashing.

Y
!

N
Check the Set Defector Actuator, for wear or damage PL 9.2.

I The SDF Jam LED is flashing.

1
1

N
Go to Flag 3 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are good, check that the Document Cover Closed Sensor Q9 is positioned correctly. If the problem still exists, replace the SDF Sensor PWB PL 9.2.

Perform the following: Check the SDF Document Path Sensor Q3 for damage and ensure that it is mounted correctly, PL 9.3, PL 9.4. Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an short circuit. If the problem continues, replace the SDF Document Path Sensor 03, PL 9.3, PL 9.4.

Ii

If the problem still exists, go to the AlIA2 Status Code RAP.

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

5.1 SDF JAM LED RAP

4/00 2-66

Workcentre XD SERIES

MIAIN PWB

PL7 1

+BVDC

(WITH S D F ONLY)

Document Co'ier Closed Sensor 0 9 SENSOR 0 9 Document cover closed (L) +5 VDC BRN

12-21

1 2 VDC

SDF Sensor

SDF Documelit Path Selisoe Q3

I
GRY

"U

UU,",

SDF DOCUMENT PATH SENSOR Q3

[z-21

Docunie~it cover closed i L I +5 VDC BRN

+5 VDC

I I

1 2 VDC

3 '
T

-GRY

v-,

Figure 1 5.j SDF Start Circuit

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

5.1 SDF JAM LED RAP manuals4you.com

8.1 Paper Tray Ready RAP


initial Actions
Ensure that the Main Paper Tray and Paper Tray 2 if applicable are closed.

Procedure
With the machine in a ready state, select the Main Paper Tray. The Main Tray LED is on and not flashing. Y N 1 Go to Flag Iand check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Tray Detect Switch S2, PL 5.1.

Open the Main Tray. The Main Tray LED is flashing. Y N I Go the Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. It the wires are good, replace the Tray Detect Switch S2, PL 5.1.

If applicable select Tray 2. The Tray 2 LED is on and not flashing. Y N 1 Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Tray 2 Detect Switch S5, PL 5.8.

Open Tray 2. The Tray 2 LED is flashing. Y N Go the Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit. It the wires are good, replace the Tray 2 Detect Switch S5, PL 5.8.

lithe problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.

This page intentionally left blank

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

8.1 Paper Tray Ready RAP

NOTES

CONNECTOR NUhilBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR IvlACHlNES EQUIPED WITH AN SDF.

TRAY LED, WILL FLASH WHEN THE TRAY IS SiLCf3ED AND OPEN.

Figure 1 Paper Tray Ready

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES
2-69

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

8.1 Paper Tray Ready RAP

manuals4you.com

This page intentionally left blank

STATUS INDICATOR RAPS

8.1 Paper Tray Ready RAP

3 lmage Quality
CQ1 Copy Defect Entry RAP ......................................................................................... Definitions ....................................................................................................................... Image Quality Diagnostics ............................................................................................. Image Quality Specification............................................................................................ CQ 2 Background (Bands) RAP...................................................................................... CQ 3 Background (Uniform) RAP ................................................................................... CQ 4 Banding RAP ......................................................................................................... CQ5 Black Copy RAP (Simplex Mode) .................................... .. ................................... CQ6 Black Copy RAP (Duplex Mode)............................................................................. CQ 7 Blank Copy RAP .................................................................................................... CQ 8 Blurred Image RAP ................................................................................................ CQ 9 Deletions (LE to TE) RAP .................................................................................... CQ 10 Light Copy RAP ...................... . . ...................................................................... CQ 11 Lines and Streaks RAP.................................. ...................................................... CQ 12 Misregistration RAP ............................................................................................. CQ 13 Residual Image RAP ................... . . ................................................................... CQ 14 Skew RAP............................................................................................................ CQ 15 SkipsISmears RAP .............................................................................................. CQ 16 Spots RAP .......................................................................................................... CQ 17 Uneven Density RAP ........................................................................................... CQ 18 Unfused Copy RAP ............................................................................................. CQ 19 Wrinkle RAP ........................................................................................................ . . ..................................................................... CQ 20 Distortion RAP ............................ CQ 21 Magnification RAP .............................................................................................. CQ 22 Image Displacement RAP..................................................................................

lmage Quality Workcentre XD SERIES

manuals4you.com

image Quality

Workcentre XD SERIES

CQ1 Copy Defect Entry RAP


Copy qual~ty refers to the entrre copy Defects can occur anywhere on the copy These defects may be damaged paper or Image quallty defects. el1m1nate problems cause the damaged paper before attempting to fix the Image quallty problems The damaged paper could cause the Image quality problems

Definitions
The following terms are commonly used to descrlbe copy quallty problems

Background
(CQ 2 Background (Bands) RAP or CQ 3 Background (Uniform) RAP) Background occurs as darkness or drrttness on the non-tmage areas of the copy

Procedure
Compare the lmage defect to the Delinrl~ons After you determrne whlch deflnrtlon best describes the defect, go to the corresponding RAP The chart whlch IS provided wrth each RAP lrsts the Posslble Causes and Corrective Actlons The Possible Causes are arranged in order from the most to the least likely cause or the ease of the check. Corrective Action(s) are given for each cause. Read all of the possible causes before taking any corrective action.

Banding
(CQ 4 Banding RAP) Banding is a condition marked by narrow, alternating dark and light bands that run across the copy, that is, in the main scanning direction.

Black Copy
(GO5 Black Copy RAP (Simplex Mode) or CQS Black Copy RAP (Duplex Mode)) A copy that is totally black with no image.

1.
2

Start w~ththe flrst poss~blecause and contlnue through the list untrl you come to the to the lmage defect cause that best appl~es Perform the corrective action. When he defect is corrected, go to the Copier Maintenance procedures in the Service Call Procedures in Section 1. If the defect is still present, continue with the other Possible Causes.

Blank copy
(CQ 7 Blank Copy RAP) A copy entirely without an image.

3.

Deletions
(CQ 9 Deletions (LE to TEJ RAP) An area of the image where information has been lost. The deletions could be localized or bands from top to bottom or side to side.

Density
(CQ 10 Light Copy RAP) or ( CQ 17 Uneven Density RAP) The relative blackness between the image and non-image areas.

Fuser Fix
(CQ 18 Unfused Copy RAP) A measure of how well the toner particles adhere to the paper as a result of the fusing process.

lmage Displacement
(CQ 22 Image Displacement RAP) Part of the image information is placed elsewhere on the copy or it is completely missing. The area of the missing information is sharply defined. This is unlike deletions where the image is not sharply defined or clear.

image Distortion
(CQ 20 Distortion RAP) Distortion of the image from one side of the copy to the other. The image from side to side or lead edge to trail edge is not parallel to the edges of the copy. This defect may result from a problem with the alignment of the optics components.

Light lmage
(CQ 10 Light Copy RAP)Copies where the density is lighter than the specified density of the copier.

Line Darkness
Darkness and uniformity of a line.

lmage Quality Workcentre XD SERIES

CQ1 Copy Defect Entry RAP, Definitions


manuals4you.com

Magnification
(CQ 21 Magnification RAP)

Unfused copy
(CQ " r Unfused Copy RAP) A copy on which the image can be easily wiped off the paper. The image has not adhered to the paper.

Misregistration
(CQ 12 Misregistration RAP) The distance from the lead edge of the image to the lead edge of the paper is not within specification. (CQ 19 Wrinkle RAP) The paper has very thin creases.

Offsetting
Transfer of toner from the copy to the Fuser Assembly Heat Roll. Sometimes the toner is transferred back to the copy or consecutive copies.

Paper Damage
Any physical distortion to the copy paper, including folds, nicks, wrinkles, etc.

Paper Handling
The process of transporting the paper from the supply area through the xerographic and fusing subsystems.

Resolution
(CQ 8 Blurred image RAP) The uniformity or clarity of fine line detail.

Residual image
(CQ -13 Residual Image RAP) An image that is repeated onto the same copy or consecutive copies. The image can be either a ghosting or the original image or a toner image. This problem can be caused by poor cleaning of the photoreceptor, a photoreceptor that is worn, a developer roll that is worn, poor cleaning of the fuser.

Skew
(CQ 1 4 Skew RAP) The image is skewed on the paper. The image from side to side or lead edge to trail edge is not parallel to the edges of the copy. This defect may result from misadjusted, contaminated, or worn paper transportation system components.

Smear
(CQ 15 SkipsiSmears) Any image defect that occurs in the direction that is perpendicular to paper feed.

Spots
(CQ 16 Spots RAP) Defects that are 0.2 inches (5 mrn) or smaller in diameter.

Streaks
(GQ 'i 1 Lines and Streaks RAP) Any image defect that occurs in the direction of paper feed.

Uneven Density
(CQ 17 Uneven Density RAP) The image darkness varies across the copy.

Image Quality

4/00

Definitions

3-4

Workcentre XD SERIES

Image Quality Diagnostics


It is important to understand the orientation of copies in order to troubleshoot image quality problems. Refer to Figure I. The following terms will be used when referring to copies made on the machine.

Image Quality Specification


Test Patterns 8213524 (NASG and XcL) and 8213523 (XE)
used on this product is the 82P524 (NASG and XCL) or the 82P523 The primary test (XE). This test pattern is the Multinational Standard Test Pattern used for the evaluation of the image quality. Side A and Side B are used to evaluate the image quality against different image quality specifications. Make four copies of each side of this test pattern in Text mode. Evaluate the Side A copies against the specifications provided in Table 1. Evaluate the Side B copies against the specifications provided in Table 2.

Test Pattern 82E12130


IMAGE SIDE UP Use Test Pattern 82E12130 to evaluate Set Document Feeder copy quality problems (skew, misregistration). If the test pattern is not available, position Test Pattern 82P524 (NASG) or 82P523 (XE) on the Document Glass and make an 8-112" x 1 4 (216 x 356 mm) copy. Ensure that the two outside 10 mm reference targets are the identical distance from the edge of the sheet. Use the copy to evaluate SDF copy quality.

TRAIL EDGE

<
(HORIZONTAL)

>

Figure 1 Copy Orientation Terms


Determining the dlstance between defects may help rsolate problems to a spec~flc component Defects that are 3 1 Inches (79 mm) apart (lead edge of the defect to lead the edge of the next could be caused by the photoreceptor The clrcumference of defect) rn the paper feed dlrect~on the photoreceptor IS 3.1 rnches (79 mm)
Defects that are 3.7 Inches (94 mm) apart (lead edge of defect to lead edge of next defect) in the paper feed drrectron could be caused by the Fuser Heat Roll. The clrcumference of the fuser heat roll IS 3.7 Inches (94 mm). (64 mm) apart (lead edge of defect to lead edge of next defect) In Defects that are 2 5 ~nches the paper feed dlrectlon could be caused by the Magnetlc Roll. The clrcumference of the Magnetlc Roll IS 2.5 Inches (64 mm).

4/00 3-5

lmage Quality

image Quality Diagnostics, image Quality Specifi-

manuals4you.com

LEAD EDGE

SIDE B

W n tonudc k y m f o h t a e n & , h e t e s lyml u r s p c v o l r e g e Wuodl ouy 1 y r o u tkem I I d a e r "do eoyvru aha genb e d l s l t m e i nad f 9 f s z t Tlha e t s t a p t e t n r ; a utmep e n e r j l e p aer nelcsHde .

W n tonudo lynm Eo h t a ervC, h e t e s lyml ursp c v o l r e g e Wuodi ouy 1 y r o u t l e m I i d a e r ndo e a y v r u ahs genb e d i s i t m e l n a d f 9 f s z t Tihz e t s t a p t e t n r ; a utmep e n e r j l e p a e r nelosHde

W n tonudc kynm f a h t a e r v b , h e t e s lyml u r s p cvolrege Wuodl ouy 1 J ~ O U t l e m I I d a e r "do eoyvru ahs genb e d l s l - t m e l nad f 9 f s z t Tlhz e t s t a p t e t n r ; a. utmep e n e r j l e p aer nelosHde
1 2

V J n zroudo Byf o hta e m & , h e t e s iyml u r s p c v o l r e g e . Viuodl ouy 1 y r o u t l e m I I d a e r ndo eoyvrli a h s genb e d l s l t m e i nad f 9 f s z t . Txhv e t s t a p t e t n r ; a utmep e n e r j l e p a e r nelosnde
$0

W n t o n u d c kynm f o h t a e r v 6 , h e t e a lyml u r s p ovolrege Wuadl ouy 1 y r a u t l e m I I d a e r nda eoyvru ahs genb e d i s l tmez nad f 9 f s z t . Tlhz e t s t a p t e t n r ; a utmep e n e r j l e p a e r nelosHde
7 ,

W n t o n u d c Aynm f a h t a
e r v e , h e t e s lyml u r s p o v o 1 r e e e . Wuadl ouv 1 y r o u t l e m I I d a e r ndo e o y v m ahs genb e d ~ s l t m e l nad f g f s z t . Tihz e t s t a p t e t n r ; a utmep e n e r j l e p aer nelcsHde
10

Figure 1 Test Pattern 82P524 (Side A)

Figure 2 Test Pattern 8213524 (Side B)

lmage Quality

lmage Quality Specification

Workcentre XD SERIES

lrnage Quality Specifications


Using the Side A copies (Test Pattern 82P524) Table 1 DEFECT
Light Copy

DEFINITION OR SPECIFICATION

REFERENCE

The .7 solid area density block nearest the center of the copy is equal to or greater than the .7 Go to CQ 'I 0 Light Copy RAP. solid area density block on the test pattern. With the dark setting selected, the .10 line pair on the test pattern is partially or completely copied. (This is a guideline only, not a specification.) The center 10 mm reference line on the copy should be 10 mm +I-2 mm from the lead edge of a 100% copy. The 10 mrn reference line on the two outside reference targets should be 10 mm +I-2 mm from the front edge of a 100% copy. Refer to the two outside reference targets on the copy to ensure that they are within 2 mm with respect to each other. (This is a guideline only, not a specification.) Refer to the two outside reference targets on the copy to ensure that they are within 2.5 mrn with respect to each other. (This is a guideline only, not a specification.) Go to CQ 12 Misregiswation RAP Go to CQ 12 Misregislraiion RAP. Go to

Misregistration (lead edge) Misregistration (side edge) Skew (Paper Tray 1) Skew (Paper Tray 2) Skew (BypassIAlternate Tray)

CQ 14 Skew RAP.

Go to CQ 14 Skew RAP.

Refer to the two outside reference targets on the copy to ensure that they are within 2.5 mm Go to CQ 14 Skew RAP. with respect to each other. (3.5 mm when using the SDF with the bypass or the alternate tray.) (This is a guideline only, not a specification.) Refer to the two outside reference targets on the copy to ensure that they are within 3 mm Go to CQ 14 Skew RAP. with respect to each other. (3.5 mrn when using the SDF with the bypass or the alternate tray.) (This is a guideline only, not a specification.) Gently rub the .7 patch four times with a paper towel (twice top-to-bottom and twice side-toside) to determine if unfused toner is present. Go to CQ 18 Unfused Copy RAP.

Skew (SDF)

Unfused Copy Resolution

The 4.3 LPImm lines of all the resolution targets in both the top-to-bottom direction and the Go to CQ 8 Blurred image RAP side-to-side direction should be resolved completely. (This is a guideline only, not a specification.)

Using the Side B copies (Test Pattern 82P524) Table 2 DEFECT


Skipslsmears Smudge Magnification

DEFINITION OR SPECIFICATION
The 2.5 LPImm array for a 100% copy should be completely resolved. (This is a guideline only, not a specification.)

REFERENCE
Go to CQ 15 SkipsiSmears.

After image transfer, the toner image that is not yet fused is rubbed by any part of the machine Inspect the copy transport area between the Transfer or foreign material. Corotron and the Fuser for the cause of this problem The size of the image on the copy is not equal to the magnificationlreduction selected within 1%. Go to CQ 21 Magnification RAP

Using the customer's original Table 3 DEFECT


Background

DEFINITION OR SPECIFICATION
The background area is darker than the corresponding area of a black-and-white original. (Classify the background defect as occurring over the entire copy, as bands in the lead edge to the trail edge direction, or as bands in the front edge to rear edge direction.)

REFERENCE
Go to CQ 2 Background (Bands) RAP. Go to CQ 3 Background (Uniform) RAP.

lmage Quality Workcentre XD SERIES

lmage Quality Specification


manuals4you.com

Table 3 DEFECT DEFINITION OR SPEClFlCATlON

Black Bands (Lead Edge To Trail Edge) Banding (in the main scanning direction) Black copy Blank 1 nearly blank copies Lines and streaks Residual image Spots Uneven density Deletions

Black bands are present from lead edge to trail edge on the copy. Narrow, repetitive, tightly packed dark and light bands appear across the copy (in the main scanning direction). The copy is black; there is no image or only a very faint image on the copy. The copy is white; there is no image or only a very faint image on the copy. One or more dark, light, or white lines appear on the copy. An electrostatic or toner image is transferred to subsequent copies. Dark toner spots adhere to non-image areas of the copy. Image darkness varies across the width of the copy. There is an area of the copy which carries no toner image or a very faint one. The deleted areas may be any shape or randomly distributed over the copy.
NOTE: There is an intentional 2-5 mm deletion (maximum) along the lead edge of all the copies. There is an intentional 3-4 mm deletion (maximum) along the trail edge of all the copies.

1 Go to CQ 2 Background (Bands) RAP


Go to CQ 4 Banding RAP Go to CQ5 Black Copy RAP (Simplex Mode). Go to CQ 7 Blank Copy RAP Go to CQ 3 1 Lines and Streaks RAP. I Go to GQ 13 Residual Image RAP. Go to CQ 16 Spots RAP. Go to CQ 17 Uneven Density RAP. Go to CQ 9 Deletions (LE to TE) RAP.

REFERENCE

(Classify the deletion defect as random or repetitive spots, as deletions in the lead edge to the trail edge direction, or as deletions in the front edge to rear edge direction.)

lmage Quality

lmage Quality Specification

4/00 3-8

Workcentre XD SERIES

CQ 2 Background (Bands) RAP


Randomly distributed toner deposits of varying density that appear as bands in the non-image areas of the copy.

Procedure
Read all the Possible Causes Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Correctwe Action.

Table 1 Possible Cause Corrective Action Contaminated Charge Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Corotron Defective Cleaning Blade Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Contaminated or defective Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2). photoreceptor DeveloperIDry Ink life Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2). exceeded. Clean the Document Glass with Lens and Mirror Cleaner and Contaminated Document a lint-free cloth. Glass

Figure 1 Background Bands

Image Quality Workcentre XD SERIES

CQ 2 Background (Bands) RAP manuals4you.com

GQ 3 Background (Uniform) RAP


Randomly distributed toner deposits of varying density that evenly cover the non-image areas of the entire copy

GQ 4 Banding RAP
Narrow, repetitive, tightly packed dark and light bands appear across the copy (in the main scanning direction).

Procedure
Read all the Poss~ble Causes Then check the mach~ne for the poss~ble cause and perform the Corrective Act~on.

Procedure
Read all the Possible Causes Then check the machlne for the poss~ble cause and perform the Corrective Action.

Possible Cause DeveloperIDry Ink life exceeded Defective Charge Corotron Defective Cleaning Blade Contaminated or defective photoreceptor Incorrect developer bias

Table 1 Corrective Action Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2).


Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Replace the Drum Cartridge (

Possible Cause Worn photoreceptor drive

I Corrective Action

Table 1

I Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).

PL 8.2).

Check the developer bias voltage ( ADJ 9.1). Adjust as required. If the problem still exists, check the developer bias contacts on the DVS Harness ( PL 2.1) for damage. Repair or replace as necessary.

Image Quality

CQ 3 Background (Uniform) RAP, CQ 4 Banding RAP

4/00 3-1o

Workcentre XD SERIES

CQ5 Black Copy RAP (Simplex Mode)


The copy is totally black with no image.

CQ6 Black Copy RAP (Duplex Mode)


Side one of a duplex copy is totally black with no image; side two copys correctly.

Procedure
Read all the Posstble Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Correctwe Actton.

Procedure
Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.

Table 1 Possible Cause Corrective Action Possible Cause Corrective Action

Table 1

Defectlve Exposure Replace the Exposure Lamp Carrlage ( REP 62 ) Lamp or connectlons Defecttve Charge Corotron Remove the Drum Cartr~dge and clean the electr~cal contacts Also wlpe the contact wires on the Power Supply PWB Re~nstall the Drum Cartrtdge If the problem st111 extsts, replace the Drum Cartr~dge ( PL

GDI Memory PWB is Power off the machine and disconnect the power cord. Ensure that the GDI Memory PWB is fully seated. If the problem still exists, not fully seated replace the GDI Memory PWB PL 7.1.

82 )
Defectlve Power Sup- Check the Power Supply PWB connecttons for contamlnatlon or dam volt- age If the problem conttnues, replace the Power Supply PWB (PSI) ( ply PWB or h ~ g h age connectlons REP 1 2 )

WorkCentre XD SERIES

4/00 3-1I

Image Quality

CQ5 Black Copy RAP (Simplex Mode), CQ6 Black

manuals4you.com

CQ 7 Blank Copy RAP


This is a copy entirely without an image.

CQ 8 Blurred lmage RAP


Poor un~form~ty or clar~ty of flne llne detail. Examlne the resolut~on targets

Procedure
Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.

Procedure
Read all the Poss~ble Causes Then check the mach~ne for the possible cause and perform the Correct~ve Action

Table 1 Possible Cause Open photoreceptor ground connection Open contact for the developer bias. Defective Transfer Corotron
Main PWB unable to process image data.

Table 1 Possible Cause Incorrect positioning of mirrors Paper feed drives Defective Fuser Defective Drum Cartridge Corrective Action Check the alignment of the Half-Rate Carriage and the Exposure Lamp Carriage. Check the drives for damage or binding. Replace the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10.1). Remove the Drum Cartridge and clean the electrical contacts. Also wipe the contact wires on the Power Supply PWB. Reinstall the Drum Cartridge. If the problem still exists, replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Clean the electrical connections with film remover and a lint free cloth.

Corrective Action
Check the photoreceptor ground connection. Check the contacts on the Drum Cartridge for damage or contamination. Go to GP1. If the toner image appears on the photoreceptor, replace the TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly ( REP 9.2). Replace the Main PWB ( REP 1 .I).

Dirty electrical connections on the Drum Cartridge or TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly

Figure 1 Blurred lmage

lmage Quality

CQ 7 Blank Copy RAP, GQ 8 Blurred Image RAP

WorkCentre XD SERIES

GQ 9 Deletions (LE to TE) RAP


An area of the image on the copy that has no toner or a very faint image.

Procedure
Read all the Poss~ble Causes. Then check the machlne for the poss~ble cause and perform the Correctrve Act~on. Table 1

I Possible Cause
Damp paper or paper curled during duplex copying DeveloperIDry Ink life exceeded Contaminated document glass Contaminated Transfer1 Detack Corotron Assembly

I Corrective Action
Use fresh paper and ensure that the customer is storing the paper correctly. Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2).

Clean the Document Glass with Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a lint-free cloth. Clean the Transfer Corotron Wire with the Corotron Cleaner. Clean the Detack Corotron with a soft brush. If the problem still exists, replace the TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly ( REP 9.2). Contaminated magnetic roll Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Contaminated photoreceptor Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Toner blockage in Toner Car- Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2). tridge Damaged or contaminated fuser heat or pressure roll Check or clean the rolls or replace the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10.1).

Figure 1 Deletions

Burrs or contamination in the Check and clean components in the paper transport path. paper transport path Contaminated Focus Correc- Clean the exposed, lower surface of the Focus Correction tion Lens in the Laser Lens Assembly Obstruction in the optics light Remove the Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1) and clean path the mirrors 1 through 3 with Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a lint-free cloth.

4/00

Workcentre XD SERIES

3-1 3

GQ 9 Deletions (LE to TE) RAP

Image Quality

manuals4you.com

GQ 10 Light Copy RAP


The image area of a copy has low density.

CQ 11 Lines and Streaks RAP


Black or white lines which appear in the direction of paper feed.

Procedure
Read all the Possible Causes. Then select a Corrective Action based on the Possible Cause after a check of the machine.

Procedure
1.
Clean the Document Glass with Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a lint-free cloth.

Table 1

I Possible Cause
Damp Paper Defective Transfer Corotron Defective photoreceptor

I Corrective Action
Use fresh paper and ensure that the customer is storing the paper correctly. Clean the Transfer Corotron Wire with the Corotron Cleaner. If the problem still exists, replace the TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly ( REP 9.2). Remove the Drum Cartridge and clean the electrical contacts. Also wipe the contact wires on the Power Supply PWB. Reinstall the Drum Cartridge. If the problem still exists, replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Check the photoreceptor ground connection. It should be less than 100 ohms.
2

NOTE: Coples wlth Ilnes or streaks whlch are caused by dlrf or confam~nat~on on the Strip or the Laser Assembly Focus Number 1 Mirror, the CCD Window, the Calibrat~on Correctlon Lens are more nslble when the orlg~nalconfalns halftones, photographs, or solid areas Fgure 7
Posltlon the customer's orlglnal on the Document Glass, select the Auto exposure settlng, and make one copy at 100 percent magnlficatlon and one copy at 78 percent magnlflcat~on Evaluate the coples for the presence of llnes or streaks caused by contamlnatlon a If the posltlon of the Ilne(s) on the 100 percent and 78 percent coples changes relatlve to the edges of the copy paper, the contamlnatlon IS In the optlcs area, that IS, before lmage processing Perform the correctlve actlons llsted In Table 1

DeveloperIDry Ink life exceeded Open high voltage return line

If the posltlon of the Ilne(s) on the 100 percent and 78 percent coples does not change relatlve to the edges of the copy paper, the contamlnatlon IS on the Focus Correctlon Lens, that IS, after lmage processing Perform the correctlve actlons l~sted In Table 2
Run additional copies of the customer's original to determine if the problem is solved. If not, go to Tabie 3 and continue checking for the possible cause.

c.

Table 1 Contamination Before lmage Processing Possible Cause


Contamination on Mirror Number 1

Corrective Action
Remove the Document Cover Assembly and the Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1). Gently clean the mirror using a dry cotton swab. Be careful that fibers from the swab are not left on the mirror. For stubborn contamination, clean the mirror with Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a lint-free cloth. Clean and replace the Document Glass and the Document Cover Assembly.

Contamination on the CCD Remove the Document Cover Assembly and the Document Window Glass Assembly ( REP & I ) , then remove the Lens Cover and the CCD Dust Cover.

CAUTION: Use only Film Remover to clean the plastic CCD Window; other solvents may damage it.
Moisten a swab with Film Remover and gently rub it across the CCD Window to remove contamination. Replace the CCD Dust Cover, the Lens Cover, the Document Glass, and the Document Cover Assembly.

lmage Quality

CQ 10 Light Copy RAP, CQ I1 Lines and Streaks RAP

4/00 3-14

Workcentre XD SERIES

Table 1 Contamination Before lmage Processing Possible Cause Corrective Action

Contamination on the Cali- Remove the Document Cover Assembly and the Document bration Strip Glass ( REP 6.1). Clean the Calibration Strip with Film Remover and a lint free cloth.

I
Possible Cause
Contamination on Focus Correction Lens

Replace the Document Glass and the Document Cover Assembly.

Table 2 Contamination After lmage Processing Corrective Action


Remove the Drum Cartridge and the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Remove dust or toner deposits from the exposed surface of the lens with a dry cotton swab. Replace the Toner Cartridge and the Drum Cartridge.

Table 3 Other Possible CauseslCorrective Actions Possible Cause


Contaminated Transfer Corotron Wire The photoreceptor surface is damaged or contaminated Poor cleaning of the photoreceptor The surface of the Fuser Heat Roll is damaged Contaminated Charge Corotron Defective photoreceptor ground

Corrective Action
Clean the Transfer Corotron Wire with the Corotron Cleaner. Determine the cause of the damage. Replace the Drum Cartridge ( P t 8.2). Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Determine the cause of the damage. Replace the Heat Roll ( REP 10.2). Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Check the photoreceptor ground connection. It should be less than 100 ohms.

lmage Quality Workcentre XD SERIES

CQ 11 Lines and Streaks RAP


manuals4you.com

Focus Correction Lens Contamination:


Solid white line(s)

CCD Window

I Contamination:
Solid black line(s)

NOTE: The appearance of these defects is exaggerated

Mirror 1 Contamination:
Black line@); may be interspersed with white

S,

Calibration Strip Contamination:

<

Black line(s) only, or black line(s) accompanied by white line(s)

Focus Correction Lens Nonuniformity:


Dark band pattern on both sides

Figure 1 Line Defects: Optics Contamination and Nonuniform Focus Correction Lens (Simulates Appearance Using .45 Contrast Density Test Pattern 186.904)

image Quality

4/00

GQ 11 Lines and Streaks RAP

3-16

VVorkGentre XD SERIES

GQ 12 Misregistration RAP
Paper Tray 1 and 2 Lead Edge: The center 10 mrn reference line on the copy should be 10 mm +I- 1.0 mm from the lead edge of a 100% copy. Paper Tray 1 and 2 Side Edge: The 10 mm line on the two outs~de reference targets should be 10 mm +I-2.0 mm from the front edge of a 100% copy. BypasslAlternate Tray Lead Edge: The 10 rnrn line on the lead edge graduated mm scale is a maximum of 10 mm +I-3.2 mm from the lead edge of the copy. BypassIAlternate Tray Side Edge: The 10 mm llne on the side edge graduated rnrn scale is a maxlmum of 10 mm +I-3.2 r n r n from the side edge of the copy. Set Document Feeder Side Edge: The 10 mm reference line on the two outside reference targets should be 10 mm +I-3.4 mrn from the front edge of a 100% copy.

Procedure
Read all the Posslble Causes. Then check the machlne for the poss~ble cause and perform the Corrective Actlon.

Table I Lead Edge Misregistration Corrective Action Show the customer how to load paper. Clean the feed and the registration rolls with Film Remover and Damaged or worn paper a lint-free cloth. Check the components for wear or damage. feeding components. Defective Registration Roll Enter Output Code 6-[2] to test the operation of the solenoid. Replace the solenoid if it binds, fails to actuate, or operates Solenoid (SOL3) intermittently ( REP 8.2). lncorrect value in [50-101 The default lead edge deletion is 2.5 mm. for the Print Start Position, Perform the Print Start Position, Lead Edge Deletion, and Scan the Lead Edge Deletion, or Start Position adjustments in the Section 6 Table 1 . the Scan Start Position Possible Cause Incorrectly loaded paper Table 2 Side Edge Misregistration Corrective Action Posltlon the s~de gulde correctly.

Figure 1 Lead Edge Misregistration

Possible Cause The s~de gulde In the paper cortray IS not poslt~oned rectly lncorrect value In 50-10 for center offset

Perform the Center Offset Adjustment procedure In the Sectlon 6 Table I .

Image Quality Workcentre XD SERIES

CQ 12 Misregistration RAP

manuals4you.com

GQ 13 Residual lmage RAP


This is an image that is repeated on the same copy or consecutive copies.

Procedure
Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.
Table 1 Possible Cause

LEAD EDGE

1 (
,111
,
'

SIDE A

"=
-, =; .

I Corrective Action
Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Replace the Heat Roll ( REP 10.2). Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).

Rogm h rszdj a l = - . 1 ' ': &

--

mFnmfel

n IE a l l h '70

Image repeated every 3.1 inches (79 mm) on copy Image repeated every 3.7 inches (94 mm) on copy Poor cleaning of the photoreceptor

=
-

--F-r-,.Sl

1 1 i -

.27
7

Rogm h rszdl a l

111

rnFnmfei n IE ailh .35B

.,.

Figure 1 Residual lmage

lmage Quality

CQ 13 Residual image RAP

4/00 3-1 8

VVorkCentre XD SERIES

CQ 64 Skew RAP
The image is skewed because the paper is skewed or the optics components are misadjusted and distort the image.

Procedure
Read all the Posslble Causes. Then check the machlne for the posslble cause and perform the Correctwe Action.

Table 1 Possible Cause Paper Tray problem Corrective Action Check the condition of the front and rear paper tray snubbers Repalr as requlred ( PL 4 I ) Ensure the paper tray guldes are correctly set Repalr as requlred ( PL 4 1) Show the customer how to load paper
Clean the paper feed and the reglstratlon rollers, and the Slngle Bypass Transport Rollers wlth Fllm Remover and a lint-free cloth Check the components for wear or damage Replace as required. The Paper Feed Roller ( REP 8 6) and the Lower Reglstratlon Roller ( REP 8 1 3 ) The Ex~t Roller ( REP 8 9) and the Lower Transport Roller ( REP8 11) The Transport Roller ( REP 8 7 ) Perform the Reglstratlon Buckle adjustment In the Section 6 labie 1 Go to CQ 20 Distortion RAP Clean the rollers w ~ t h F~lm Remover and a Ilnt-free cloth Check the components for wear or damage Replace as required Show the customer how to load orlglnals In the SDF

The paper is not loaded correctly Damaged or contamlnated paper feed rollers, reglstratlon roller, or transport rollers

Figure 1 Skew

incorrect settlng In 51-[2] Optics problem Worn or contamlnated SDF Retard Roller, Feed Roller, or Transport Roller SDF Front and Rear Guides incorrectly posltloned Obstruction in the SDF document path

Open the SDF Feed Assembly and check for obstructions Remove any obstructions which are present Mlsallgnment of the SDFJDSDF Allgn the SDFIDSDF Assembly (ADJ 5 1) Assembly

Image Quality WorkCentre XD SERIES

CQ 14 Skew RAP manuals4you.com

Areas of the image on the copy are blurred. This occurs at the image transfer area. The 2.5 LPImm ladder lines are not completely clearly visible.

I
I

LEAD EDGE

Procedure
Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.

Wn tonride P v m fo hta ervC, h e t e s iyml ursp ovolrege Wuodl ouy 1 yrou tlem I I daer "do eoyvru ah* genb e d l s l t m e i nad f 9 f s z t Tlhz e t s t aotetnr: . a utmeD enerjlep aer nelcs~d'e

Possible Cause Defective TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly Worn or damaged paper feed components.

Table 1 Corrective Action Replace the TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly ( REP 9.2).
Clean the paper feed and registration rollers, and Single Bypass Transport Roller with Film Remover and a lint-free cloth. Check the components for wear or damage. Replace as required: The Paper Feed Roller ( REP 8.6) and the Lower Registration Roller ( REP 8.1 3) The Exit Roller ( REP 8.9) and the Lower Transport Roller ( REP 8.1 1) The Transport Roller ( REP 8.7) Remove the Document Cover Assembly and the Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1). Do not remove any other components in the optics area. Clean the carriage rails with a lint free towel. Replace the half rate carriage scan rails if they are damaged ( PL 3.1). Use fresh paper and ensure that the customer is storing the paper correctly.

Figure 1 Skips and Smears

Contaminated or damaged scan rails

Damp or curled paper

Dirty electrical connections Clean the connections with film remover and a lint free cloth on the Drum Cartridge or the as required. TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly

Image Quality

GQ 15 SkipsfSmears

CQ 15 Spots RAP
Circular black spots or irregular shaped black images on the copy.

Procedure
Read all the Poss~ble Causes Then check the mach~ne for the possible cause and perform the Correctwe Act~on. Table 4 Possible Cause Contam~nated document glass Damp or wrrnkled paper Corrective Action Clean the Document Glass w~th Lens and Wl~rror Cleaner and a I~nt-free cloth Use fresh paper and ensure that the customer IS storing the paper correctly. Replace the Drum Cartr~dge ( PL 8 2)

SIZE OF BACKGROUND SPOT

Defectwe, damaged or contam~nated photoreceptor 0 2). Contam~nated fuser heat Replace the Heat Roll ( REP 4 roll Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8 2) Worn magnetic roll Clean the Registrat~on Roll Contam~nated Registratron Roll

Figure 1 Spots

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES
3-21

image Quality

GQ 16 Spots RAP

manuals4you.com

CQ 17 Uneilen Density RAP


The density and line thickness vary across the copy.

CQ 18 Unfused Copy RAP


The characters or image are easily wiped off a copy.

Procedure
Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.
Table 1 Possible Cause Defective or contaminated photoreceptor Corrective Action

Procedure
Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.
Table 1 Possible Cause

Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Clean the Transfer Corotron Wire with the Corotron Cleaner ( PL 5.3). If the problem still exists, replace the Transfer1 Detack Corotron Assembly ( REP 9.2). Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2). Remove the Document Cover Assembly and the Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1) and clean the mirrors 1 through 3 with Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a lint-free cloth.

Damp Paper Incorrect Fuser temperature

Contaminated Transfer Corotron DeveloperlDry Ink life exceeded Low toner Dirty Mirrors

Corrective Action Use fresh paper and ensure that the customer is storing the paper correctly. Ensure that the Fuser temperature is set correctly for the customer paper that is used most often. Heavy weight paper may require a higher temperature. Light weight paper may require a lower temperature. Refer to the appropriate parameter adjustment table in Section 6: - Adjustment Codes - Table 1 Programmable Features Settings - Table 1 Configuration Codes

Defective Fuser Heat or Pressure Roll

Replace the Fuser Assembly (

REP 10.1).

Image Quality

4/00

GQ 17 Uneven Density RAP, GQ 18 Unfused Copy

3-22

Workcentre XD SERIES

CQ 19 Wrinkle RAP
This is damage that is probably caused by the Fuser. This is a severe case of creases that run in the direction of paper travel.

CQ 20 Distortion RAP
Two types of image distortion can be attributed to misadjustment of the optics components horizontal image distortion (Figure 1) and vertical image distortion ( Figure 2).
NOTE: Perform the checks in GQ 14 Skew RAP before checking the optics components.

Procedure
Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.
NOTE: Wrinkles may occur when envelopes are run. Refer to the User Guide for information on running envelopes.

Procedure
Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action. Table 1 Possible Cause Corrective Action Half Rate Carriage or Go to ADJ 6.7. Exposure Lamp Carriage misadjusted The Left or the Right Half Go to ADJ 6.7. Rate Carriage Scan Rail is misadjusted

Possible Cause Damp paper

Table 1 Corrective Action

I Use fresh paper and ensure that the customer IS storing the

paper correctly. Damaged or contamiClean all of the paper feed and transport rollers with Film nated paper feed rollers, Remover and a lint-free cloth. Check the components for wear registration roller, or trans- or damage. port rollers Damaged or contaminated Fuser Heat Roll or Pressure Roll Replace as required either the Heat Roll ( Pb 6.1) ( REP 10.2), the Pressure Roll ( PL 6 . 2 ) (REP 1 0 . 3 ) , or both.

Figure 1 Horizontal lmage Distortion Examples

Figure 2 Vertical lmage Distortion Examples

lmage Quality WorkCentre XD SERIES

GQ 19 Wrinkle RAP, GQ 20 Distortion RAP

manuals4you.com

CQ 21 Magnification RAP
The image on the copy is not within specification for the selected magnification.

6 6 1 22 image Displacement RAP


Part of the image information is placed elsewhere on the copy or is completely missing. The area of the missing information is sharply defined, as in Figure 1, where the right side of the image is displaced to the left side. lmage displacement is unlike deletions, where the image is not sharply defined or clear.

Initial Actions
Replace the copy paper with a new supply. Ensure that the optics are clean.

Procedure
Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action. Table 1 Corrective Action Possible Cause Replace the Main PWB (REP 1.I). Defective Main PWB is providing inaccurate information to the Laser Mod-

Procedure
Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action. Table 1 Corrective Action If the LensICCD Module was removed, reinstall it to the reference position ( ADJ 6.2). Perform ADJ 6.7. Perform ADJ 6.8. Replace the Main PWB ( REP 1.1).

Possible Cause Incorrect value in 48- [ I ]

lmage Processing Problem

Figure 1 lmage displacement example

lmage Quality

CQ 21 Magnification RAP, CQ 22 image Displacement

4/00

3-24

Workcentre XD SERIES

4 . Repairs and Adjustments


Repairs Electrical
REP 1.1 Main PWB ........................................................................................................ REP 1.2 Power Supply PWB (PSI) ................................................................................ REP 1.3 Control Console PWB ....................................................................................... REP 1.4 Power Receptacle .............................................................................................
..

Paper Feed
REP 8.1 Paper Feed Solenoid (SOL1) ............................................................................ REP 8.2 Registration Roll Solenoid (SOL3) .................................................................... REP 8.3 Paper Feed Sensor ( Q l )......................... . . ..................................................... REP 8.4 Bypass Feed Sensor (Q2) (XDIOO/XD102)...................................................... REP 8.5 Tray Detect Switch Harness ............................................................................ REP 8.6 Paper Feed Roller ............................................................................................ REP 8.7 Transport Roller (XD100/XD102) .................................... .................................. REP 8.8 Side Door Interlock Switch (S3lS4) ................................................................... REP 8.9 Exit Roller.................... . . .............................................................................. REP 8.10 Manual Exit Drive Belt..................................................................................... REP 8.1 1 Lower Transport Roller .................................................................................. REP 8.12 Main Drive Assembly ................................... .. ............................................... REP 8.13 Lower Registration Roller................................................................................ REP 8.14 Tray Detect Switch (S2) .................................................................................. REP 8.15 Feed Roll (XD104) ......................................................................................... REP 8.1 6 Retard Roll (XD104)........................................................................................ .. ........................................... REP 8.1 7 Feed Solenoid (XD104) ................................... . .................................. REP 8.20 Tray 2 paper Feed Sensor (Q7) ........................... . . . . ................................................ REP 8.21 Tray 2 Detect Switch (S5) ....................... REP 8.22 Tray 2 Paper Feed Solenoid (SOL2) ............................................................. REP 8.23 Tray 2 Transport Roller .................... . . .......................................................... REP 8.24 Tray 2 Paper Feed Clutch ..................... . . ..... .... ....................................... REP 8.25 Tray 2 Feed Roller ...................... . . ...........................................................

Main Drive
REP 4.1 Main Drive Motor (MOTI) ................................................................................. Notes: ..............................................................................................................................

SDFIDSDF
REP 5.1 SDF Assembly ........................... . . .................................................................. REP 5.2 SDF Sensor PWB ............................................................................................ REP 5.3 Feed Solenoid (SOLI) ...................................................................................... REP 5.4 Clutch .......................... .... .............................................................................. REP 5.5 Feed Roller / Retard Roller ............................................................................. REP 5.6 Exit Drive Belt ................................................................................................... REP 5.7 SDF Drive Motor (MOTI) ............................................................................... REP 5.8 Document Path Sensor ((23) .......................................................................... REP 5.9 Transport Roller .................... . . ..................................................................... REP 5.1 0 Exit Roller ....................................................................................................... REP 5.15 DSDF Assembly ............................................................................................ REP 5.16 DSDF Sensor PWB ....................................................................................... REP 5.17 DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOL1) ............................ . . ....................................... REP 5.1 8 DSDF Feed Clutch .............. . . ..................................................................... REP 5.1 9 DSDF Feed Roller/Retard Roller .................................................................... REP 5.20 DSDF Drive Motor (MOTI) ............................... .............................................. REP 5.21 DSDF Document Path Sensor (Q3) ................................................................ REP 5.22 DSDF Feed Assembly .................................................................................... REP 5.23 DSDF Transport Assembly ............................................................................. REP 5.24 DSDF Pinch Roll Solenoid (SOL2) .......................... . . .................................. REP 5.25 DSDF Exit Roller............... . . ........................................................................ REP 5.26 DSDF Transport Roller ................................................................................ REP 5.27 DSDF Duplex Transport Roller ...................................................................... REP 5.28 DSDF Duplex Drive Roller .............................................................................. REP 5.29 DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid (SOL3) ........................................................ REP 5.30 DSDF Exit Drive Motor (MOT5) ...................................................................... REP 5.31 DSDF Clutch (CL1) .........................................................................................

Xerographies
REP 9.1 Toner Motor (MOT4) ................................................................................ REP 9.2 TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly ................................................................. Notes: ..............................................................................................................................

Copy Transportation & Fusing


REP 10.1 Fuser Assembly .............................................................................................. REP 10.2 Heat Roll ........................... . . ....................................................................... REP 10.3 Pressure Roll ............................................................................................... REP 10.4 Thermistor (RTI) ............................................................................................. REP 10.5 Fuser Jam Sensor (Q3) ..................... . . ........................................................ REP 10.6 Ventilation Fan (MOT 3) .................................................................................. REP 10.7 Exit Sensor ((24) ............................................................................................. REP 10.8 Heat Rod ......................................................................................................... REP 10.9 Thermostat .................................................................................................. REP 10.10 Paper Guide .................................................................................................. REP 10.11 Stripper Fingers ......................................................................................... REP 10.12 Fuser Gate .................................................................................................... 4-53 4-53 4-54

...

Optics
REP 6.1 Document Glass Assembly .............................................................................. REP 6.2 Exposure Lamp Carriage ..................... . . ...................................................... REP 6.3 Scan Drive Motor (MOT2) ............... . . .......................................................... REP 6.4 Laser Module .................................................................................................... REP 6.5 Lens/CCD REP 6.6 Optics Frame

covers
REP 14.5 Control Console ............................................................................................. 4-101 REP 14.7 Output Tray ................................................................................................ 4-101

............................................................................................

......................................................

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

manuals4you.com

Notes: .............................................................................................................................

Adjustments
SDFIDSDF
ADJ 5.1 SDFIDSDF Skew ..............................................................................................

Optics
ADJ 6.1 Copy Density (Exposure) .................................................................................. ADJ 6.2 LensJCCD Module ............................................................................................ ADJ 6.7 lmage Distortion (Horizontal and Vertical)........................................................ ADJ 6.8 lmage Magnification ..........................................................................................

Paper Feed
ADJ 8.2 Lead Edge Deletion........................................................................................... ADJ 8.3 Trail Edge Deletion............................................................................................ ADJ 8.4 Lead Edge Registration.................................................................................... ADJ 8.5 SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration.................................... ..............................

Paper Feed
ADJ 9.1 Developer Bias ................................................................................................. ADJ 9.2 Grid Bias ............................................................................................................

Repairs and Adjustments

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 1.1 Main PWB


Parts List on PL 7.1 Removal
WARNIING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. CAUTION Record ail Conf!gigurationCodes before removlng the Main PWB (refer to Seci",on6, Goni~gigura

REP 1.2 Power Supply PWB (PSI)


Parts List on PL %*I Removal
WARNING
Switch OM the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1.
2.

Remove the Document Cover Assembly. Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the Top Left Cover. Remove the Output Tray (REP 14.7). Move the Power Receptacle (REP 1.4).

I/on Codes)
1

Remove the Document Cover Assembly Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the SIX screws and the PWB Cover (PL 7 I) Disconnect all the Rlbbon Cables and Harnesses from the M a ~ n PWB Remove the six mount~ng screws and the Maln PWB.

3. 4. 5. 6.

2. 3.

(Figure I): Remove the Power Supply PWB.

4.
5.

Replacement
1.
2. If the Main PWB is being replaced, carefully remove the GDI Memory PWB from the old PWB and install it on the new PWB.

2
Disconnect the connectors

Reassemble the Copier. Enter diagnostics and reset any Configuration Codes that were different than the factory defaults. If the Main PWB has been replaced, perform the following: a. Copy Density (AD4 6.1) b. Image Magnification (AD$ 6.8) c. Lead Edge Registration (AD4 8.4) d. e. f. g. SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration (ADJ 8.5 ) Lead Edge Deletion (ADJ 8.2) Trail Edge Deletion (ADJ 8.3) Center Offset Adjustments (refer to Section 6 Adjustment Codes)

3.
4.

3
Remove the PWB

1
Remove the screws

Figure 1 Removing the Power Supply PWB

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 1. I , REP "12 manuals4you.com

REP 1.3 Control Console PWB


Parts List on Pk 1.3 Removal

REP 1.4 Power Receptacle


Parts List on PL 7.1 Removal

WARN1NG
Switch off t h e Main Power Swsitch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1.

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect t h e Power Cord. 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly. 2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3.

2.

Remove the Control Console (REP '14.5). (Figure 4): Remove the Control Console PWB.

4.

Remove the Top Left Cover. Remove the Output Tray (REP 14.7).

1
Remove the screws (6) and the Control Cons Cover
@ A

NOTE: The Power Receptacle is wired to the Power Supply PWB. This procedure shows how to detach it from the Base Assembly
5.

(Figure 1): Move the Power Receptacle from its position on the Base Assembly.

Remove the PWB from

3
Push the wires and the receptacle through the hole

2
Remove screws (

SKYOOTN

screws Figure 1 Removing the Control Console PWB

Figure 1 Moving the Power Receptacle

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 1.3, REP 1.4

REP 4.1 Main Drive Motor (MOT1)


Parts List on PL 2.2 Removal

Notes:

WARNING
Switch off t h e Maim Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1. 2.

Remove the Document Cover Assembly. Remove the Rear Cover.

3.

(Figure 1): Remove the Maln Drlve Motor.

Disconnect the Ribbon Cable

3
Remove the motor

Remove the screws

Figure 1 Removing the Main Drive Motor

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

manuals4you.com

Repairs and Adjustments

4/00

REP 4.1,

4-6

VVorkCentre XD SERIES

REP 5.1 SDF Assembly


Parts List on PL 9-1A Removal

REP 5.2 SDF Sensor PWB Parts List on PL 9.2


Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord 1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Remove the six screws and the PWB Cover (PL 7.1)
NOTE: Cut cable ties or release cable clamps as necessary

WARNiNG
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. (Figure 1): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.

2
Remove the

3.
4

Disconnect the ground wire and cable comlng from the SDF Assembly
Lift the SDF Assembly up slowly off the Document Glass Whlle tilting the hinges In the rear dlrectlon, lift the hlnges out of the hinge guldes

1
Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly

Figure 1 Removing the Covers


2.

(Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.1, REP 5.2


manuals4you.com

2
Remove the spring

Remove the Top Cover

Remove the screws, the Document Guide, and the SDF Feed

'" 8

Disconnect the two connectors

1
Remove the screws

Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly

Figure 3 Removing the Top Cover


4.

3.

(Figure 3): Remove the Top Cover.

(Figure 4): Remove the SDF Sensor PWB.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.2

4/00 4-8

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.3 Feed Solenoid (SOL11


1
Remove the screws

Parts List on PL 9.2 Removal

WARNING
Switch off t h e Main Power Switch. Disconnect " r e Power Cord. 1 . (Figure 1): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.

2
Remove the covers

2
Remove the SDF Sensor PWB and disconnect the connector

1
Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly

0500004A-SKY

Figure 4 Removing the SDF Sensor PWB

Figure 1 Removing the Covers


2.

(F~gure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.

Repairs and Adjustments WorkCentre XD SERIES

REP 5.2, REP 5 . 3


manuals4you.com

2
Remove

2
Remove the Tor, Cover
A

Remove the screws. the Document Guide, and the SDF Feed

Disconnect the two connectors

1
Remove the screws

Figure 2 Removing the S D F Feed Assembly

Figure 3 Removing the Top Cover


4.

3.

(Figure 3): Remove the Top Cover.

(Figure 4): Remove the Feed Solenoid.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.3

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.4 Clutch


Parts List on PL 9.2 Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect %hePower Cord,

1.

(Figure 1): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.

1
Remove the screws

2
Remove the

I]
Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly Disconnect the plunger and remove the solenoid

Figure 4 Removing the Feed Solenoid

Replacement
CAUTION l f tile posibon of the Feed Soienoid (SOLIJ IS adjusted too far lo the left the Iravei of the piunger wiii be reslr~cied and it wiil be unaoie to fuiiy actuate the Paper Gate and the Feed

Roiler I f necessary, adjust the poslt~on of the Feed Solenold (SOLI) sl~ghtly to ensure that the Feed
Clutch Pawl clears the Clutch when the Feed Solenold plunger t~on
IS

held In the energized posi2

Figure 1 Removing the Covers (Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.3, REP 5.4


manuals4you.com

2
Remove the spring
1

p/

. Remove
the belt

2
Remove the Top Cover

Remove the screws, the Document Guide, and the SDF Feed

Disconnect the two connectors

1
Remove the screws

Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly

Figure 3 Removing the Top Cover


4.

3.

(Figure 3): Remove the Top Cover.

(Figure 4): Prepare to remove the clutch.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.4

4/00 4-12

WorkCentre XD SERIES

Remove the pulley and the bearing

1
Remove the E-ring remove the shaft

2
Remove the clutch components

Figure 5 Removing the Clutch

Replacement
CAUTION
Move the bushing out of the frame

if We position of the Feed Soienoid (SOL?) is adjusted too far to the left, the travel of the plunger wiii be restricted and it will be unable to f u l l y actuate the Paper Gale and the Feed
Roller. If necessary, adjust the position of the Feed Solenoid (SOL?) slightly to ensure that the Feed Clutch Pawl clears the Clutch when the Feed Solenoid plunger is held in the energized position.
0500006A-SKY

Figure 4 Preparing to Remove the Clutch


5.

(Figure 5 ) : Remove the clutch.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5 . 4
manuals4you.com

REP 5.5 Feed Roller / Retard Roller


Parts List on Pk 9.2 Removal
2
Remove the spring

WARNING
Switch off the Main Powel Switch. Desconnect the Power Cord. 1. (F~gure I): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.

\
I \

2
Remove the covers

/
1
Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly

Remove the screws, the Document Gu~de, and the SDF Feed Assembly

1
Disconnect the two connectors

Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly

3.

(Figure 3):Remove the Top Cover.

Figure 1 Removing the Covers

2.

(Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.5

VVorkCentre XD SERIES

1
2
Remove the Top Cover Remove the Dressure spring from the Paper Gate and move the gate out of the way

3
Remove the Feed Roller Assembly

Move the Feed Roller Assembly against the tension spring and move the bearina out of the frame

Figure 3 Removing the Top Cover


4.

Figure 4 Removing the Feed Roller Assembly


5.

(figure 4): Remove the Feed Roller Assembly.

(Figure 5): Remove the Retard Roller.

Workcentre XD SERIES

4/00 4-15

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.5

manuals4you.com

REP 5.6 Exit Drive Belt


1
Pull the gear end of the roller out of the frame
NOTE: Be careful not to lose the Feed Shaft bearings

Parts List on PL 9.3 Removal


WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch, Disconnect the Power Cord, 1. (Figure I): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.

2
Remove the covers

2
Move the E-ring and the Feed Shaft

h ,
1
Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly

Feed Shaft

Figure 5 Removing the Retard Roller

Figure 1 Removing the Covers


2.

(Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.5, REP 5.6

Workcentre XD SERIES

2
Remove the spring

Remove the screws, the Document Guide, and the SDF Feed

Disconnect the two connectors

Remove the two screws and the Document Tray

Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly

Figure 3 Removing the Document Tray


4.

3.

(Figure 3): Remove the Document Tray.

(Figure 4): Remove the Exit Drive Belt.

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5 . 6 manuals4you.com

REP 5.7 SDF Drive Motor (MOTI)


Parts List on PL 9.3 Removal WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Swibeirs. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. (Figure 1): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.

2
Remove the covers

"I

/
\1
Remove the belt from the pulley

Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly

Figure 4 Removing the Exit Drive Belt

Figure 11 Removing the Covers


2.

(Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.6, REP 5.7

Workcentre XD SERIES

2
Remove the spring Document

\ /
Remove the screws, the Document Guide, and the SDF Feed

2
Tray

Remove the five screws and the SDF Transport

SDF Transport Assembly

..,--

Disconnect the two connectors

Remove the two screws and the Document Tray

Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly

Figure 3 Removing the Document Tray


4.
(Figure 4): Remove the Exit Drive Belt.

3.

(Figure 3): Remove the Document Tray.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.7
manuals4you.com

3
Remove the four screws and the Remove the screw and the post that holds the Motor Mounting Plate

NOTE: Do not remove the screws from the rear

Remove connector

NOTE: Make sure the Drive Belt is positioned this way during reassembly

1
Remove the belt from the pulley

Figure 4 Removing the Exit Drive Belt


5.

Figure 5 Removing the SDF Drive Motor

(Figure 5): Remove the SDF Drive Motor.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5 . 7

4/00

4-20

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.8 Document Path Sensor (Q3)


Parts List on PL 9.3 Removal 2
Remove the spring

WARNING
Switch off t h e Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. (Figure 1). Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.

2
Remove the covers

1
Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly

two connectors

0500002A-SKY

Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly

3. (Figure 3): Remove the Document Tray.

Figure I Removing the Covers


2.

(Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5 . 8
manuals4you.com

Tray

2
Remove the five screws and the SDF Transport

SDF Transport Assembly

1
Remove the belt from the pulley

Remove the two screws and the Document Tray

Figure 3 Removing the Document Tray


4.

Figure 4 Removing the Exit Drive Belt


5.

(Figure 4): Remove the Exit Drive Belt.

(Figure 5): Remove the Document Path Sensor.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5 . 8

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.9 Transport Roller


2
Release the sensor mounting tabs and remove the sensor

Parts List on PL 9.3 Removal


WARNING
Owlkh off t h e Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1 . (Figure 1): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.

2
3
Disconnect the connector Remove the covers

Loosen the screw until the Document Exit Guide swings down and out of the way

1
Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly

Document Exit Guide

0500013A-SKY

Figure 5 Removing the Document Path Sensor

Figure 1 Removing the Covers


2.

(Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.8, REP 5.9


manuals4you.com

2
Remove the spring

a ,

Document Tray

2
Remove the five screws and the SDF Transport

SDF Transport Assembly

two connectors

Remove the two screws and the Document Tray

0500002A-SKY

Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly (Figure 3): Remove the Document Tray.
4.

Figure 3 Removing the Document Tray

(Figure 4): Remove the Exit Drive Belt.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5 . 9

Workcentre XD SERlES

2
Remove the E-rings and bearings and remove the Transport Roller

Loosen the screw until the Document Exit Guide swings down and out of the way

&*,

Remove the belt from the pulley

Document Exit Guide

Figure 4 Removing the Exit Drive Belt


5. (Figure 5): Remove the Transport Roller.

Figure 5 Removing the Transport Roller

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.9
manuals4you.com

REP 5.10 Exit Roller


Parts List on PL 9.3 Removal
2
Remove the spring
\a
rn

WARNiNG
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord, 1. (Figure 1): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.

"\

Remove the belt

2
Remove the covers

4
Remove the screws. the Document Gu~de, and the SDF Feed

1
Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly

Disconnect the two connectors

Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly

3. (Figure 3): Remove the Document Tray.

Figure 1 Removing the Covers


2.

(Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.10

Workcentre XD SERIES

Document Tray

Remove the five screws and the SDF Transport

SDF Transport Assembly

\ I

Remove the belt from the pulley

Remove the two screws and the Document Tray

Figure 3 Removing the Document Tray


4.

Figure 4 Removing the Exit Drive Belt


5. ( Figure 5): Remove the Exit Roller.

( Figure 4): Remove the Exit Drive Belt.

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.16
manuals4you.com

REP 5.15 DSDF Assembly Parts List on PL 9.18


Removal WARNiNG
2
Remove the E-rings and bearings and remove the Exit Roller

Switch off the Main Power Switch. B~sconneei the Power Cord.
1.
2.

Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the h~nges and place it on top of the machine. (F~gure 1). Remove the Rear Cover and the Access Cover.

1
Remove the four

Document Exit Guide

1
Loosen the screw until the Document Exit Guide swings down and out of the way

J
Figure 5 Removing the Exit Roller

0500015A-SKY

0500030a

Figure 1 Removing the Covers

3.

(Figure 2): Remove the PWB Cover.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.10, REP 5.15

Document Cover Closed

Remove the six screws and remove the cover

0500031a

Figure 2 Removing the PWB Cover


4.

(Figure 3): Remove the Document Feeder Assembly.

0500038a

Figure 3 Removing the Document Feeder Assembly

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.15
manuals4you.com

REP 5.16 DSDF Sensor PWB


Parts List on PL 9.2 Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1. 2.

Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22). (Figure I): Remove the Feed Assembly Top Cover.

1
Re
screws

Feed Assembly Top Cover

2
Remove the DSDF Sensor PWB and disconnect the connector

0500043a

Figure 2 Removing the DSDF Sensor PWB

Remove the two screws and remove the Feed Assembly Top Cover

Figure 1 Removing the Top Cover

3.

(Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Sensor PWB.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.16

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5 . 1 1 7 DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOhl) Parts List on PL 9.2


Removal

WARNING
Switch OHthe Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.

1
2.

Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5 22). (F~gure 1). Remove the Feed Assembly Top Cover. Sensor PWB and disconnect the connector

0500044a

Remove the two screws and remove the Feed Assembly

Figure 2 Removing the DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOLI)

Replacement
0500042a

Figure 1 Removing the Top Cover

CAUTION I f the position of the DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOL 1) is adjusted too far to the /eft the travei of the plunger wi/\ be restricted and it will be unabie lo fully actuate the Paper Gale and the Feed Roller
If necessary, adjust the position of the DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOLI) slightly to ensure that the Feed Clutch Pawl clears the Clutch when the DSDF Feed Solenoid plunger is held in the energized position.

3.

(Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOL1).

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.17
manuals4you.com

REP 5.18 DSDF Feed Clutch


Parts List on PE 9.2 Removal WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly ( REP 5.22). 2. ( Figure I ) : Remove the Feed Assembly Top Cover.

2
Lift the clutch pawl and remove the DSDF Feed Clutch Assemblv \

1
Remove the E-Ring and the pulley and bushing

Feed Assembly Top Cover

NOTE: During reassembly, place the iron core onto the solenoid arm

Bushing moved out

Figure 2 Removing the DSDF Feed Clutch Assembly


4.

(Figure 3): Remove the DSDF Feed Clutch.

Remove the two screws and remove the Feed Assembly Top Cover

Figure 1 Removing the Top Cover

3.

(Figure 2 ) : Remove the DSDF Feed Clutch Assembly.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.18

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.19 DSDF Feed RollerIRetard Roller Parts List on PL 9.2


Remove the E-Ring and remove the feed clutch

Removal WARNING
Switch of the Main Power Switch, Disconnect t h e Power Card. 1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22). 2. (Figure 1): Remove the Feed Assembly Top Cover.

Clutch

Figure 3 Removing the DSDF Feed Clutch

Replacement
CAUTION If the posibon of the DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOL I ) 1 s adjusted too far lo the ieft, the fravei of the piunger wiii be resfncfcd and 11 wli be unable lo fully actuate the Paper Gale and the Feed Ro//er

Remove the two screws and remove the Feed Ass Top Cover

If necessary, adjust the position of the DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOLI) slightly to ensure that the Feed Clutch Pawl clears the DSDF Feed Clutch when the DSDF Feed Solenoid plunger is held in the energized position.

Figure 1 Removing the Top Cover

3.

(Figure 2) Remove the DSDF Feed RollerIRetard Roller Assembly.

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.18, REP 5.19

manuals4you.com

NOTE: During reassembly, place the Feed Assembly onto the solenoid arm

2
Remove the pin and gear and remove the

Remove the Paper Gate Spring from the Paper Gate and move the gate

NOTE: Be careful not to lose the Feed Shaft gears or bushings

Paper ( Spring

Tension Spring

shaft and remove the Feed Roller


Figure 3 Removing the DSDF Feed Roller or Retard Roller

0500048a

Remove the Feed RollerIRetard Roller

Move the Feed RollerIRetard Roller Assembly against the tension sarina spring and move the bearing out of the frame
0500047a

Figure 2 Removing the Feed Assembly 4.

(Figure 3): Remove the DSDF Feed Roller or Retard Roller.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.19

4/00

4-34

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.20 DSDF Drive Motor (MOT1)


Parts List on PL 9.4 Removal

REP 5.21 DSDF Document Path Sensor (Q3)


Parts List on Pb 9-15: Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1.
2.

WARNiNG
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22). 2. Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5.23). 3. (Figure 1): Remove the Document Guide.

3.

Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22). Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5.23). (F~gure 1): Remove the DSDF Drive Motor (MOTl).

DSDF Dr~ve Motor (MOTl)

\
2
Remove the two screws and remove Drive Motor (MOTl)

1
Remove the two screws and remove the Document Guide

1
Disconnect the connector

Guide

0500052a

Figure 1 Removing the Drive Motor (MOT1)

Figure 1 Removing the Document Guide


4.

(Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Transport Roller Repairs and Adjustments

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.20, REP 5.21


manuals4you.com

3
Disconnect the connector

Pinch the Tabs and push them through the frame to remove the sensor

Sensor Tabs

,I
DSDF Transport Roller
0500056a

Loosen the screw until the Document Guide is released, and move it in the direction shown

Figure 2 Removing the Duplex Transport Roller 5.

(Figure 3): Remove the SDF Document Path Sensor (Q3)

/
Document Guide

Figure 3 Removing the Document Path Sensor (Q3)

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.21

Workcentre XD SERIES

Parts List on Removal

REP 5.22 DSDF Feed Assembly Pi 9.2


WARNING

Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect t h e Power Cord 1. (Flgure 1). Remove the Duplex Tray

A3.

Remove the four screws, and remove the DSDF Cover Figure 2 Removing the DSDF Cover

(Figure 3): Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly.

0500039a

Figure 1 Removing the Duplex Tray


2.

(Figure 2 ) : Remove the DSDF Cover.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.22 manuals4you.com

REP 5.23 DSDF Transport Assembly


Remove the Tension Spring, the Drive Belt, and remove the DSDF Feed Assembly

Parts List on PL 9.4 Removal


WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22). 2. (Figure I): Remove the Transport Assembly.

2
Disconnect connector
Deflection Ga Solenold

NOTE: Observe the position of the p~nch roll solen o ~ bracket d

Remove the two screws and remove the Document Tray

3
Remove the five screws and remove the Trans~ort

y
Transport Assembly Figure 1 Removing the Transport Assembly isconnect the two connectors

3. (Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Transport Drive Belt.

0500041a

Figure 3 Removing the DSDF Feed Assembly

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.22, REP 5.23

Workcentre XD SERIES

Drive Motor Bracket

Remove the three screws and remove the Drive Motor

Exit Drive Belt

0500050a

Figure 2 Removing the Transport Drive Belt


4. (Figure 3): Remove the DSDF Drive Belt

NOTE: During reassembly place the Drive Belt as shown

0500051a

Figure 3 Removing the DSDF Drive Belt

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.23
manuals4you.com

REP 5.24 DSDF Pinch Roll Solenoid (SOL2)


Parts List on PL 9-4 Removal

REP 5.25 DSDF Exit Roller


Parts List on PL 9.4 Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22). 2. Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5.23). 3. (Figure 1): Remove the DSDF Pinch Roll Solenoid (SOL2)

WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Card.
1. 2. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22). Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5.23). Remove the DSDF Transport Roller (REP 5 26). Remove the DSDF Duplex Transport Roller (REP 5.27). (Figure 1): Remove the Lower Paper Guide.

3.
4. 5.

DSDF Pinch Roll Solenoid (SOL2)

2
Remove the two screws and remove Pinch Roll Solenoid

Disconnect the connector

Lower Paper Guide

1
Remove the two screws and remove the Lower Paper Guide

Figure 1 Removing the Pinch Roll Solenoid (SOL2)

NOTE: Notice the two mounting positions of the Document Guide

0500061a

Figure 1 Removing the Document Guide 6.

(Figure 2): Remove the Upper Paper Guide

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.24,REP 5.25

Workcentre XD SERIES

1
Umer P a ~ eGuide r Remove the -Rings and remove the Hardware shown

Remove the two screws and remove the Upper Paper Guide Figure 2 Removing the Upper Paper Guide
7.

Remove the DSDF Exit Roller Figure 3 Removing the DSDF Exit Roller

(F~gure 3): Remove the DSDF Exit Roller

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.25
manuals4you.com

REP 5.26 DSDF Transport Roller


Parts List on Pk 9.4 Rernoval
WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. DisconnecMhe Power Cord. 1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5 2 2 ) . 2. Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5.23). Loosen the screw and move the Paper Guide down

3. (Figure 1): Remove the Document Guide.


Document Guide

1
Remove the two screws and remove the Document Guide

Remove the E-Rings and bearings and remove the Duplex Transport Roller Guide

Duplex iransport Roller

Figure 2 Removing the Duplex Transport Roller

Figure 1 Removing the Document Guide


4.

(Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Duplex Transport Roller

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.26

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.27 DSDF Duplex Transport Roller


Parts List on PL 9.4 Removal
1
Remove the E-Rings and bearings and remove the DSDF Transport Roll Clutch

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1 Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5 22) 2 Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5 23) (F~gure 1) Remove the Document Gu~de. 3

1
Remove the two screws and remove the Document Guide

i
Guide

DSDF Transport Roll Clutch (CLI)

0500058a

Figure 2 Removing the Transport Roll Clutch (CL1)

5. (Figure 3): Remove the DSDF Duplex Gate

Figure 1 Removing the Document Guide


4.

(Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Transport Roll Clutch (CL1) Repairs and Adjustments

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.27
manuals4you.com

2
Remove the Duplex Gate (snaps off)

Duplex Gate

1
Remove the Document Guide and the Duplex Transport Roller Loosen the screw and move the Document Guidedown 1 Document Guide

Duplex Transport Roller Document Guide


0500060a

Figure 4 Removing the Duplex Transport Roller

Figure 3 Removing the Duplex Transport Roller


6.

(Figure 4): Remove the DSDF Duplex Transport Roller

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.27

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.28 DSDF Duplex Drive Roller


Parts List on %a&. 1-4 Removal WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Saivitch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Unlatch the TransferIDetact Corotron at each end and remove it. 2 (Figure 1): Remove the inner Paper Guide.

1
Bend the flexible Duplex Drive Roller at the center and remove it

Duplex Drive Roller

Figure 2 Removing the Duplex Drive Roller

Paper Guide

w
0500034a

Figure 1 Removing the Covers

3.

(F~gure 2): Remove the Duplex Dr~ve Roller.

Repairs and Adjustments WorkCentre XD SERIES

REP 5.28
manuals4you.com

REP 5.29 DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid (SOL31


Parts List on PL 9.1A Removal
WARNING
Switch offthe Main Powor Switch. Disconnect tine Power Cord. 1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22). 2. Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5.23).
3. (Figure 1): Remove the Deflection Gate. NOTE: Notice the position of the Gate Spring (next to the inside frame) before removing it Deflection Gate Solenoid (SOL3)

2
Lift the Deflection Gate up and remove

Remove the retainer clip and slip the bearing out of the inside

05000ffia

Figure 2 Removing the Deflection Gate Solenoid (SOL3)

NOTE: Notice the position of the Deflection Gate mounting on the solenoid before removing it

0500064a

Figure 1 Removing the Document Guide 4.


(Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid (SOL3)

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.29

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.30 DSDF Exit Drive Motor (MOT5)


Parts List on Pk 2.1 Removal

WARNiNG
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly.
2

Main PWB Cov

Document Cover Closed Sensor (Q9)

( Figure 1): Remove the Rear Cover and the Access Cover.

1
Remove the four screws ,

Remove the six screws and remove the cover

Figure 2 Removing the PWB Cover


4.

(Figure 3): Remove the Main PWB.

Figure 1 Removing the Covers

3.

(Flgure 2): Remove the PWB Cover.

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.30

manuals4you.com

NOTE: Be sure to engage the Exit Drive Motor Gear with the

all
to the screws and remove the Main PWB

Remove the two screws, remove the Exit Drive Motor Cover, and Exit Drive Motor (MOT5)

00033a

Figure 3 Removing the Main PWB Figure 4 Removing the Exit Drive Motor (MOT5)
(Figure 4): Remove the Exit Drive Motor (MOT5).

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.30

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5.31 DSDF Clutch (CL1)


Parts List on Pb 9.4 Removal

WARMING
Switch o f the Main Power Switch. Disconnect t h e Power Cord.

1.
2.

3.

Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5 22) Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5 23) (Figure I): Remove the Transport Assembly.

NOTE: Observe the posrtion of the clutch engagement

2
Remove the E-R~ng and remove the clutch

1
Remove the two Tie wraps and disconnect the connector

Figure 1 Removing the DSDF Clutch (CL1)

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 5 . 3 6
manuals4you.com

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 5.31

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 6.1 Document Glass Assembly


Parts List on PL I ,I Removal

REP 6.2 Exposure Lamp Carriage


Parts List on PL 3.1 Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Di~connecf the Power Cord. 1 . Remove the follow~ng:
a. b. c.
2

WARNING
Switch off tho Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord, 1. Remove the following: a. Document Cover Assembly b. Rear Cover c. Top Right Cover d. Document Glass Assembly (REP 6,l) (Figure 1): Prepare to remove the Exposure Lamp Carriage.

Document Cover Assembly Rear Cover Top R~ght Cover

(Figure 1): Remove the Document Glass Assembly


2.

Remove the Document Glass Assembly

1 2
Remove the Top Left Cover Remove the screw and the bracket (Front and ear)

1
Remove th screw
SKYOOSN

Disconnect the carriage from the Scan Cable (Front and Rear)

Figure 1 Removing the Document Glass Assembly

Figure 1 Preparing to Remove the Exposure Lamp Carriage

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 6.1, REP 6.2


manuals4you.com

CAUTiON

REP 6.3 Scan Drive Motor (MOT21


Parts List on PL 3.1 Removal WARNING
Switckn off the Main Power S ~ t i t c hDisconnect . the ~Ilrbniokcord.
1.
2.
3.

Be carefuf not to damage the ribbon cabie.


3.
(Figure 2): Remove the Exposure Lamp Carriage

3
Remove the Exposur Lamp Carriage

Remove the Document Cover Assembly Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the PWB Cover (PL 7 1).

2
Disconnect the Ribbon Cable

4.

(Figure 1): Remove the Scan Dr~ve Motor.

1
Move the carriage to the frame cutout

Disconnect the Ribbon Cable

Figure 2 Removing the Exposure Lamp Carriage

Replacement
After reassembling the machine, perform the following adjustment: Image Distortion (Horizontal and Vertical) AD$ 6.7. screws

Remove the motor

Figure 1 Removing the Scan Drive Motor

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 6.2, REP 6.3

WorkCentre XD SERIES

REP 6.4 Laser Module


Parts List on PL 3.3 Removal

REP 6.5 LensICCD Module


Parts List 0 1 7 PL 3.2 Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch Disconnect the Power Cord.
1
Remove the follow~ng. a Document Cover Assembly b. Rear Cover c d. e f. g. h.
I

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord

Remove the follow~ng: a. Document Cover Assembly b. c. Rear Cover Top Right Cover

Top R~ght Cover Top Left Cover Slde Door Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6 I ) Control Console ( REP 14 5) Ma~n PWB ( REP I 7 )
2.

3.

Remove the Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6 1). ( Figure I). Remove the LensICCD Module.

1
Remove the screws (4) and the Lens Cover

Optlcs Frame Assembly ( REP 6 6) E x ~Roller t ( REP 8 9) j k Manual E x ~Drrve t Belt ( REP 8 10) ( Figure 1) Remove the Laser Module

3
Remove the screws (2)

2 ---. Disconnect the

2
Remove the belt

1
Remove the screws (6)

Ribbon Cable

4
Remove the module

Screw Location (Front)

Screw Location (Rear)

1
2
Remove the Laser Module Lift the tab and remove the knob

Figure 1 Removing the LensICCD Module

Replacement
1.
Figure 1 Removing the Laser Module
If the LensICCD Module is being replaced, perform LensICCD Module ( ADJ 6.2).

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 6.4, REP 6.5

manuals4you.com

REP 6.6 Optics Frame Assembly


Parts List on PL 3.1 Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.

Document Cover Assembly Rear Cover Top Right Cover Top Left Cover Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1) Control Console ( REP 14.5) Main PWB ( REP 1 . I )

3.

g. Remove the three screws from the upper portion of the PWB Mounting Bracket ( PL 7.1). ( Figure 1): Remove the Optics Frame Assembly.

I
Remove the five screws from inside the Optics Frame Assembly
A

2
Remove the / Optics Frame Assembly Remove the two screws from outside the Optics Frame Assembly

Figure 1 Removing the Optics Frame Assembly

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 6.6

REP 8.1 Paper Feed Solenoid (SOL11


Parts List on PL 2 2 Removal

REP 8.2 Registration Roll Solenoid (SOL31


Parts List on Pk 2.2 Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1 Remove the followrng a Document Cover Assembly b Rear Cover c Top R~ght Cover d Top Left Cover e S~de Door Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6 1) f g. Control Console ( REP 14 5) Maln PWB ( REP 1 I ) h Opt~cs Frame Assembly ( REP 6 6) I E x ~Roller t ( REP 8 9) j Manual Ex~t Drrve Belt ( REP 8 10) k Maln Drlve Assembly ( REP 8 12) I ( Figure I). Remove the Paper Feed Solenold 2

WARNING
Switch off t h e Main Power Switch, Disconnect t h e Power Card. 1. Remove the following: a. Document Cover Assembly b. Rear Cover c. d. e. Top Right Cover Top Left Cover Side Door Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1) Control Console ( REP 14.5) Main PWB ( REP 1.1) Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6)

f.
g. h. i.

2.

Exit Roller ( REP 8.9) j. k. Manual Exit Drive Belt ( REP 8.10) I. Main Drive Assembly ( REP 8.12) ( Figure 1): Remove the Registration Roll Solenoid.

2
Remove the belt

2
Remove the solenoid

2
Remove the belt

2
Remove the solenoid

d
Remove screw

1
Remove screw

1
Lift the tab and remove the knob

Lift the tab and remove the

l ' . p + @

Figure 1 Removing the Paper Feed Solenoid

Figure 1 Removing the Registration Roll Solenoid

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.1, REP 8.2


manuals4you.com

REP 8 . 3 Paper Feed Sensor (Q1)


Parts List on PL 5-73 Removal WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Swiich. Disconnect the Power Card.
1.

Remove the following: a. b. c. d. e. Document Cover Assembly Rear Cover Top Right Cover Side Door Fuser Assembly (REP 10 1) (Figure 1): Remove the Upper Front Paper Guide.

2.

"I
Remove. h . t , e screws (3)

,
Figure 2 Removing the Paper Feed Sensor

2
Remove the guide

Figure 1 Removing the Upper Front Paper Guide


3.

( Figure 2): Remove the Paper Feed Sensor

Repairs and Adjustments

4/00

REP 8.3

4-56

Workcentre XD SERlES

REP 8 . 4 Bypass Feed Sensor (Q2) (XD100KD102)


Parts List on P B b52 Removal 1
Remove the screw

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the follow~ng, a. Toner Cartr~dge b Drum Cartrrdge c Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the h~nge hous~ngs and place ~ton top of the mach~ne d. Rear Cover e. Top Rrght Cover f S~de Door g Fuser Assembly h Ma~n Dr~ve Assembly Harness Gu~de 2 ( F~gure 1) Remove the Upper Cover

4
Remove the cover

Hidden tab

3
insert a screwdriver here and gently pry to release the hidden tab.

Figure 1 Removing the Upper Cover

3.

( Figure 2): Remove the Bypass Feed Sensor.

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 8.4
manuals4you.com

REP 8.5 Tray Detect Switch Harness Parts List on PL 5.1


1
Release the
+..h,.

Removal

WARNING
Switch off %he Main Power Switch. Dlsccsnnlact t h e Power Cord.
1.

Remove the following: a. Document Cover Assembly b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. Rear Cover Top Right Cover Top Left Cover Side Door Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.9) Control Console ( REP 14.5) Main PWB ( REP 1.1) Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6) Laser Module ( REP 6.4) Main Drive Assembly ( REP 8.12)

2
Remove the sensor

2.

( Figure 1): Remove the Intermediate Frame Assembly.

Figure 2 Removing the Bypass Feed Sensor

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.4,REP 8.5

Workcentre XB SERIES

4
Remove the assembly

2
Remove the guide

3
p

Disconnect the connectors and the ground wire

Figure 2 Removing the Upper Front Paper Guide


4.

( Figure 3): Remove the Tray Detect Switch Harness.

3
Remove the harness from

Remove the two screws and the Fuser Connector

1
Release the tabs

Figure 1 Removing the Intermediate Frame Assembly

3.

( Figure 2): Remove the Upper Front Paper Guide.

Figure 3 Removing the Tray Detect Switch Harness

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 8.5
manuals4you.com

REP 8.6 Paper Feed Roller


Parts List on PL 5,l Removal

REP 8.7 Transport Roller (XD1OOMD1Q2)


Parts List on PL 5.2 Removal

WARNING
Switch offthe Main Power Switch. Disconnect % h e Power Cord.
1. 2.

WARNING
Switrtr offthe Main Power Switch, Disconnect the Power Cord.
1.

Remove the Paper Tray. ( Figure 1): Remove the Paper Feed Roller.

Remove the following: a. Toner Cartridge b. c. Drum Cartridge Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the hinge housings and place it on top of the machine.

2
Remove the

2.

d. Rear Cover e. Top Right Cover f. Side Door g. Fuser Assembly h. Main Drive Assembly Harness Guide ( Figure 1): Remove the Upper Cover.

Raise the side of the copier and remove the E-ring and the roller

Figure 1 Removing the Paper Feed Roller

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.6, REP 8.7

Workcentre XD SERIES

1
Remove the screw

1
Remove the screws (3)

3
Remove the frame

2
Disconnect the ground wire

Figure 2 Removing the Bypass Frame


SKY045N

4.

( Figure 3): Turn over the Bypass Frame and remove the Transport Roller.

Figure 1 Removing the Upper Cover

3.

( Figure 2 ) . Remove the Bypass Frame.

Repairs and Adjustments WorkCentre XD SERIES

REP 8.7
manuals4you.com

REP 8.8 Side Door interlock Switch (S3IS4)


3
Remove the components

Parts List on PL 5.3, PL 5.4 Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Maira Power Switckr. Disconnect t h e Power Cord. 1. Remove the following: a Toner Cartridge
b c.
d

e f

1
Remove the E-ring and move the bearing

g h

Drum Cartridge Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the hlnge housings and place ~ton top of the machlne Rear Cover Top Right Cover S~de Door Fuser Assembly Maln Dr~ve Assembly Harness Gu~de

NOTE: Although the Upper Covers on the XDlOO and the XD102 are not ldentlcal to the Upper Cover on the XD104, t h ~ s procedure may be used to remove the similar components.
2

( Figure 4) Remove the bypass Upper Cover

2
Remove roller

Figure 3 Removing the Transport Roller

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.7, REP 8.8

Workcentre XD SERIES

1
Remove the screw

2
Remove the

~emove the screw

Figure 2 Removing the Side Door Interlock Switch

den tab.

Figure 1 Removing the Upper Cover

3.

( F~gure 2) Remove the S ~ d e Door Interlock Switch

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERlES

REP 8.8
manuals4you.com

REP 8.9 Exit Roller


Parts List on PL 2.1 Removal

3.

( Figure 2): Remove the Exit Roller.

3
WARNI1NG
1
Release the tab and remove the pulley

Switch off the Main Power Switch. Discon~nect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the following: a. Document Cover Assembly
b. c. d. e. Rear Cover Top Right Cover Top Left Cover Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1) Control Console ( REP 14.5) Main PWB ( REP 1 . I ) Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6)

f.
g. h.
2.

( Figure 1): Open the Exit Guide.

Lift the Exit Roller straight up, being careful not to break the mounting holders

Exit

Figure 2 Removing the Exit Roller

1
Disconnect springs

Figure 1 Opening the Exit Guide

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.9

4/00 4-64

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 8.10 Manual Exit Drive Belt Parts List on PL 2,l


Removal

REP 8.1 1 Lower Transport Roller Parts List on PL 2.1


Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Povgea Switch Disconnect the Power Cord.
1

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the following: a. Document Cover Assembly

Remove the following a Document Cover Assembly b Rear Cover c d e f g h


I

b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
2.

Rear Cover Top Right Cover Top Left Cover Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1) Control Console ( REP 14.5) Main PWB ( REP 1.1) Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6) Exit Roller ( REP 8.9) Manual Exit Drive Belt ( REP 8.10)

Top Rlght Cover Top Left Cover Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6 1) Control Console ( REP 14 5) Ma~n PWB ( REP 4 2 ) Optlcs Frame Assembly ( REP 6 6)

Exlt Roller ( REP 8 9 ) ( Figure 1). Remove the Manual Exlt Dr~ve Belt

j. ( Figure 1): Prepare to remove the roller.

Remove thebelt

1
Lift the tab and move the pulley 'move

1
Lift the tab and remove the knob Lift the tab and remove the knob

I Figure 1 Removing the Manual Exit Drive Belt

SKY034N

Figure 1 Preparing to Remove the Roller

3.

( Figure 2): Remove the Lower Transport Roller.

Workcentre XD SERlES

4/00 4-65

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.1 0, REP 8.1 1

manuals4you.com

REP 8.12 Main Drive Assembly


2
Remove the belt

Parts List on PL 2-1 Removal

WARMING
Switch ONthe Main Pavves Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.

1
Remove the roller

1.

Remove the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.


j. k.

1
Lift the tab and remove the knob

Document Cover Assembly Rear Cover Top Right Cover Top Left Cover Side Door Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6 I ) Control Console ( REP 14.5) Main PWB ( REP 2.1) Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6) Exit Roller ( REP 8 9) Manual Exit Drive Belt ( REP 8.10)

SKYO~~N

Figure 2 Removing the Lower Transport Roller

2. ( Figure I): Remove the Harness Guide.

2
1

Remove the

1
L~ft the tab and remove the knob

Figure 1 Removing the Harness Guide

3.

( Ftgure 2) Remove the Maln Drlve Assembly and the E x ~Drlve t Belt.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.1 1, REP 8.12

4/00

4-66

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 8.13 Lower Registration Roller


2
Remove the belt Remove the screws (5)

1
Disconnect the groun

4
Remove the belt

Parts List on Pb 5 . 1 Removal


WARNING
Switch obi; the Main Power Switch. Disconnect t h e Power Cord. 1. Remove the following: a. Document Cover Assembly

b. c. d. Lift the tab and remove the knob Remove the assembly, being careful to hold the gears in place
SKY037N

Rear Cover Top Right Cover Top Left Cover Side Door Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1) Control Console ( REP 24.5) Main PWB ( REP 1.1) Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6)

e. f. g. h. i.

2.

Laser Module ( REP 6.4) j. Main Drive Assembly ( REP 8,12) k. ( Figure 1): Remove the Intermediate Frame Assembly.

Figure 2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.12, REP 8 . 1 1 3

manuals4you.com

Remove the assembly

Remove the screws (3)

2
Remove the guide

3
Disconnect the connectors and the ground wire

Figure 2 Removing the Upper Front Paper Guide


4.

( Figure 3): Remove the Lower Registration Roller.

Remove the two screws and the Fuser Connector

Figure 1 Removing the Intermediate Frame Assembly

3.

( Figure 2): Remove the Upper Front Paper Guide.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.13

4/00

4-68

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 8.14 Tray Detect Switch (S2)


Parts List on Pk 5.1 Removal
Remove the roller

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Card. 1. Remove the following: a. Document Cover Assembly b. Rear Cover c. Top Right Cover d. Top Left Cover e. Side Door f. Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1) g. Control Console ( REP 14.5) h. Main PWB ( REP I .I) i. Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6) Laser Module ( REP 6.4) j. k. Main Drive Assembly ( REP 8.7 2) 2. ( Figure 1): Remove the Intermediate Frame Assembly.

2
Movethe bearing

.-1
Remove the -screw, ground plate, a i d E-ring

Figure 3 Removing the Lower Registration Roller

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 8.13, REP 8.14


manuals4you.com

I
Remove th screws (3)

2
Remove the guide

3
Disconnect the connectors and the ground wire

Figure 2 Removing the Upper Front Paper Guide


4.

( Figure 3): Remove the Tray Detect Switch

Remove the two screws and the Fuser Connector

1
Release the tabs

Figure 1 Removing the Intermediate Frame Assembly

3.

( Figure 2): Remove the Upper Front Paper Guide.

SKYOSON

Figure 3 Removing the Tray Detect Switch

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.14

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 8.15 Feed Roll (XDlO4)


Parts List on Pk 5 . 5 Removal

WARNING
S w k h off the Main Power Smsit@h. Di~c6inkiect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the following: a. Toner Cartridge b. Drum Cartridge c. Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the hinge housings and place it on top of the machine. d. Rear Cover e. Top Right Cover f. Side Door g. Fuser Assembly h. Main Drive Assembly Harness Guide 2. ( Figure 1): Remove the Upper Cover.

I
Remove the screw

4
Remove the cover

Hldden tab

3
insert a small screwdriver here and gently pry to release the hidden tab.

11

Release the tabs

Figure 1 Removing the Upper Cover

3.

( Figure 2): Remove the Bypass Frame.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.15
manuals4you.com

1
Remove the screws (3)

3
Remove the assembly Remove the screws

3
Remove the frame

2
Disconnect the ground wire

Disengage the shaft

Figure 2 Removing the Bypass Frame


4.

( Figure 3): Remove the Feed Roll and Shaft Assembly

Figure 3 Removing the Feed Roll and Shaft Assembly


5.

( Figure 4): Remove the Feed Roll.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.15

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 8.15 Retard Roll (XDI 04) Parts List on PL 5.5


Removal

WARNliNG
Switch off t h e Main Power Switch, Disconnect the Power Cord.

1.

3
Remove the Feed Roll

Remove the shaft

Remove the following: a. Toner Cartridge b. Drum Cartridge Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the hinge housings c. and place it on top of the machine. d. Rear Cover e. Top Right Cover f. g. h. Side Door Fuser Assembly Main Drive Assembly Harness Guide

2.

( Figure 1): Remove the Upper Cover.

Figure 4 Removing the Feed Roll

Replacement
1.
Re~nstall the Feed Roller w~th the label or~ented as shown In ( Figure 4)

Repairs and Adjustments


Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 8.15, REP 8.66


manuals4you.com

1 1
Remove the screw Remove the screws (3)

3
Remove the frame

2
Disconnect the ground wire

. , . "

the Insert a small screwdr~ver her release the hidden tab.

Figure 2 Removing the Bypass Frame


4.

( Figure 3): Remove the Feed Roll and Shaft Assembly

Figure 1 Removing the Upper Cover


3.

( Figure 2): Remove the Bypass Frame.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.16

Workcentre XD SERIES

3
Remove the assembly

\
1
Remove the screws (2)

2
Disengage the shaft

Figure 4 Removing the Retard Roll

Retard Roll

Figure 3 Removing the Feed Roll and Shaft Assembly


5. ( Figure 4): Remove the Retard Roll.

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 8.16

manuals4you.com

REP 8.17 Feed Solenoid (XD104)


Parts List on PL 5.5 Removal
1
Remove the screw

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1.
Remove the following: a. Toner Cartridge b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2.

Drum Cartridge Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the hinge housings and place it on top of the machine. Rear Cover Top Right Cover Side Door Fuser Assembly

Main Drive Assembly Harness Guide ( Figure 1): Remove the Upper Cover,

Insert a smail screwdriver her release the h ~ d den tab.

Figure 1 Removing the Upper Cover

3.

( Figure 2): Remove the Bypass Frame.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.17

Workcentre XD SERIES

1
Remove the screws (3)

3
Remove the assembly Remove the

3
Remove the frame

2
2
Disconnect the ground wire Disengage the shaft

Figure 2 Removing the Bypass Frame


4.

( Figure 3): Remove the Feed Roll and Shaft Assembly

Figure 3 Removing the Feed Roll and Shaft Assembly


5.

( Figure 4): Remove the Feed Solenoid.

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

manuals4you.com

REP 8.20 Tray 2 Paper Feed Sensor (Q7)


Parts List on PL 5.8
Removal

WARMING
Switch off the? Main Power Switch. Dtsconnecl the Power Cord. 1. ( Figure 1): Remove the Rear Cover.

1 1
Cut the cable tie Remove the screw and remove the Rear Cov

3
Remove the solenoid

2
Remove the screw NOTE: Engage the Latch when reinstalling the Rear Cover

Figure 4 Removing the Feed Solenoid


2.

Figure 1 Removing the Rear Cover


( Figure 2): Remove the Tray 2 Drive Assembly.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.17, REP 8.28

NOTE: When reinstalling Tray 2 Drive Assemblx make sure rt is mounted on the locator posts

i?.
Remove the screw and disconnect the ground wire

1
Open the Lower Side Door Remove the screws (2)

Release the pawls and remove the sensor

Lower the drive arm gear and remove the Drive Assembly

0500018A- SKY

Figure 2 Removing the Drive Assembly

Figure 3 Removing the Paper Feed Sensor (Q7)

3. ( Figure 3): Remove the Tray 2 Paper Feed Sensor ((27).

Workcentre XD SERIES

4/00 4-79

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.28

manuals4you.com

REP 8.21 Tray 2 Detect Switch (S5)


Parts List on PL 5.8 Removal
NOTE: When reinstalling Tray 2 Drive Assembly, make sure it is mounted on the locator posts

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Diocorrnecl t h e Power Cord. 1.

( F~gure f ): Remove the Rear Cover.

1
Remove the screw and remove the Rear Cov

2
/Remove the screw and disconnect the ground wlre

NOTE: Engage the Latch when reinstalling the Rear Cover

Remove the screws (2)

0500016A-SKY
Figure 1 Removing the Rear Cover
2.

Lower the drlve arm gear and remove the Drlve Assembly
0500017A-SKY

( Figure 2): Remove the Tray 2 Drive Assembly.


Figure 2 Removing the Drive Assembly

3.

( Figure 3): Remove the Detect Switch (S5).

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.21

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 8.22 Tray 2 Paper Feed Solenoid (SOL21


Parts List on Pig 5.8 Removal

WARNING
Swltch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. ( Figure 1): Remove the Rear Cover.

1
Remove the screw and remove the Rear Cover

1
Release the tabs and remove the Detect Switch (S5)

NOTE: Engage the Latch when reinstalling the Rear Cover

connector

Figure 1 Removing the Rear Cover

05000r9A-SKy
Figure 3 Removing the Detect Switch (S5)

2.

( Figure 2): Remove the Tray 2 Drive Assembly.

Repairs and Adjustments WorkCentre XD SERIES

REP 8.21, REP 8.22

manuals4you.com

NOTE: When reinstalling Tray 2 Drive Assembly, make sure it is mounted on the locator posts

Remove the screw and d~sconnect the ground wire

1
0 Sl
Remove the screws (2)

Solenoid

Lower the drive arm gear and remove the Drive Assembly Figure 3 Removing the Paper Feed Solenoid (SOL21 Figure 2 Removing the Drive Assembly

0500020A-SKY

3.

( Figure 3): Remove the Paper Feed Solenoid (SOL2)

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.22

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 8.23 Tray 2 Transport Roller


Parts List on PL 5.8 Removal
NOTE: When reinstalling Tray 2 Drive Assembly, make sure it is mounted on the locator posts

WARNING
Switch off the blain Pcrcver Switch. Diseona-rectthe Power Cord 1. ( Figure I): Remove the Rear Cover

1
Remove the screw and remove the Rear Cover

Remove the screw and

NOTE: Engage the Latch when reinstalling the Rear Cover Side Door screws (2)

Figure 1 Removing the Rear Cover


2.

4
Lower the drive arm gear and remove the Drive Assembly

( Figure 2): Remove the Tray 2 Dr~ve Assembly.

Figure 2 Removing the Drive Assembly


3.

( Figure 3): Remove the Transport Roller.

Workcentre XD SERIES

4/00 4-83

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.23

manuals4you.com

REP 8.24 Tray 2 Paper Feed Clutch


Parts List on PL 5.8 Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Powe8 Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord
1.
( Frgure 1): Remove the Rear Cover.

1
Remove the E-ring

Remove the screw and remove the Rear Cov

NOTE: Ensure the ground spring is in contact with the bearing when reinstalling the bearing

Remove the E-ring and bearing and remove the Transport Roller

NQTE: Engage the Latch when reinstalling the Rear Cover

Figure 1 Removing the Rear Cover


050002lA-SKY

( Figure 2): Remove the Tray 2 Drive Assembly.

Figure 3 Removing the Transport Roller

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.23, REP 8.24

NOTE: When reinstalling Tray 2 Drive Assembly, make sure it is mounted on the locator posts Move the clutch pawl out of the way and remove the clutch NOTE: Match up the clutch with the flat surface of the Feed Roller Shaft during reinstallation

1
Remove the E-ring

1
Open the Lower Side Door

Lower the drive arm gear and remove the Drive Assembly

NOTE: Notice the position of each end of the spring before clutch disassembly

Figure 2 Removing the Drive Assembly

Figure 3 Removing the Paper Feed Clutch

3. ( Figure 3): Remove the Paper Feed Clutch.

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 8.24
manuals4you.com

REP 8.25 Tray 2 Feed Roller


Parts List on PL 5.8 Removal
WARNlNG
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconasect tho Power Cord.
1. ( Figure 1): Remove the Rear Cover. NOTE: When reinstalling Tray 2 Drive Assembly, make sure it is mounted on the locator posts

1
Remove the screw and remove the Rear Cover

2
Remove the screw and disconnect the ground wire

Rear Cover NOTE: Engage the Latch when reinstalling the Rear Cover
0500016A-SKY

Remove the screws (2)

Figure 1 Removing the Rear Cover


2.

Lower the drive arm gear and Assembly remove the Dr~ve

( Figure 2): Remove the Tray 2 Drive Assembly.


Figure 2 Removing the Drive Assembly

0500017A-SKY

3.
4.

Remove the Tray 2 Clutch ( REP 8.24). ( Figure 3): Remove the Tray 2 Feed Roller

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.25

Notes:
Remove the E-ring Disconnect the spring to the arm and remove this unit

2
Remove the E-ring

Feed

NOTE: Ensure the ground spring is in contact with the bearing when reinstalling the bearing

Figure 3 Removing the Feed Roller

Workcentre XD SERlES

4/00 4-87

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.25,

manuals4you.com

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 8.25,

REP 9.1 Toner Motor (MOT41


Parts List on PL 2.1 Removal

REP 9.2 Transder/Detack Gorotron Assembly


Parts List on PL 1.4, PL 7.3 Removal

WARMING
Switch off the Main Power Switch Disconnect the Power Cord
1. 2. 3. 4.

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Pocves Cord.
1. 2.

Remove the Document Cover Assembly. Remove the Rear Cover Remove the Maln PWB ( REP 1 I )
( F~guro I): Remove the Toner Motor.

Open the Side Door. ( Figure 1): Remove the TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly.

2
Release the locking pawl

1
Disconnect the harness

1
screws Release the locking pawl

3
Figure 1 Removing the Toner Motor Remove the assembly

SKYOOZN

Figure 1 Removing the TransferIBetack Corotron Assembly

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 9.1, REP 9 . 2

manuals4you.com

Repairs and Adjustments

4/00

4-90

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP "%.I Fuser Assembly


Parts List on PL 6.1
Removal

REP 10.2 Heat Roil


Parts List on PL 6.1
Removal

WARNING
Switch off the hlatla Power S w k b ODessonneci the Power Cord, Allow t h e Fuser to cool before performing the procedure
1.
2.

WARNING
S w t c h off the Vlaia7 Power Switch Drecorrs*cbthe Paever Cord A1Bo'ir*i the Fu-er to cool before perforrnrng the procedure I Remove the Document Cover Assembly 2 Remove the Rear Cover 3 Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10 1) 4 Remove the Paper Gu~de ( REP 15 10)
NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary.
5.

3.
4

Remove the Document Cover Assembly. Remove the Rear Cover. Door Open the S ~ d e

( Figure 1): Remove the Fuser Assembly.

( Figure 1): Remove the End Covers and open the assembly.

4
Disconnect the connectors (3) Remove the screw

% , Remove the LeftEnd 1 Cover

, '

Remove the two screws and the

Remove the screws (2)

3
Remove the Right End Cover

Figure 1 Removing the End Covers

6.
Figure 1 Removing the Fuser Assembly
7.

Remove the Heat Rod ( REP 10.8). ( Figure 2): Remove the Heat Roll.

Repairs and Adjustments WorkCentre XD SERIES

REP 10.1, REP 10.2


manuals4you.com

REP 4 1 0 . 3 Pressure Roll


2
Remove the Heat Roll

Parts List on PL 6-2 Removal

WARNING
Switch off the blain Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. Alisw t h e Fueer to coo8 before performing the proced~rre. Remove the Document Cover Assembly 1
2

Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10 1) Remove the Paper Guide ( REP 10 10)

Remove the / retaining ring and bearing

Remove the retaining ring, gear, and bearing

3 4.

NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary.


5.

( Figure I ) : Remove the Right End Cover and open the assembly.

1
Remove the screws (2)

3
Remove the Right End Cover

n
Figure 2 Removing the Heat Roll

2
Remove the screw

SKY017N

Figure 1 Removing the Right End Cover


6. (Figure 2): Remove the Pressure Roll Arms.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 10.2, REP 10.3

1
Pull the Pressure Roll out of the bearings and remove it along with the washers

Figure 2 Removing the Pressure Roll Arms


7.

( Figure 3): Remove the Pressure Roll.

Figure 3 Removing the Pressure Roll

Workcentre XD SERIES

4/00 4-93

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 10.3

manuals4you.com

REP 10.4 Thermistor (RT1)


Parts List on PL 6.1 Removal

REP 10.5 Fuser Jam Sensor (63) Parts List on PL 6.1


Removal WARNING
Switch off the Main Powgor Switch. Dssconnect the Power Cord. Atlow the Fuser to cool bebore per forming the procedure. 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly. 2. Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10 I). ( REP 10 10). 4. Remove the Paper Gu~de
3.

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch, Disconnect the Power Cord. Allow the Fusea to cool before performing the procedure 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2.

3.

Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10.1).

NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary

4.

( F~gure I ) : Remove the Thermistor.

NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary.


5.

( Figure 1): Remove the Right End Cover.

2
Remove the screw and the thermistor

1
Remove the screws (2)

3
Remove the Right End Cover

1
Disconnect the thermistor wires from the Fuser Assembly (cut the cable tie)

2
Remove the screw

SKY017N

Figure 1 Removing the Right End Cover Figure 1 Removing the Thermistor 6. ( Figure 2): Remove the Fuser Jam Sensor.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 10.4, REP 10.5

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 10.6 Ventilation Fan (MOT 3)


1
Remove the screw

2
Remove the sensor

Parts List on PL 2.1 Removal

WARNBNG
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.

1.
2.

Remove the Document Cover Assembly. Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the six screws and the PWB Cover ( PL 7.1). ( Figure 1): Remove the Ventilation Fan.

3. 4.

1
Disconnect the connector

Figure 2 Removing the Fuser Jam Sensor

U
SKY063N

Remove the screws (2)

Figure 1 Removing the Ventilation Fan

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES
4-95

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 10.5, REP 10.6

manuals4you.com

REP 10.7 Exit Sensor (Q4)


Parts List on PL 6.3 Removal

REP 10.8 Meat Rod


Parts List on PL 6,id Removal

WARNiNG
Switch off the Main Power SwikCh. Disconnect t h e Power Cord. 1 . Remove the following: a. Document Cover Assembly
b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2.

WARNHNG
Switch off t h e Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. Allow t h e before pedorming t h e procedure.
1.
2.
hKsek

to coon

Remove the Document Cover Assembly Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( Remove the Paper Gulde (

Rear Cover Top Right Cover Top Left Cover Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1) Control Console ( REP 14.5) Main PWB ( REP 1.1)

3. 4.

REP 10 1). REP 10 10).

NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary.


5.

Figure 1): Remove the Right End Cover.

Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6) ( Figure 1 ) : Remove the Exit Sensor. Remove the screws (2)

3
Remove the Right End Cover

2
Remove the screw

2 1
Remove the plastic shield

\\

Release the tabs and remove the sensor

Figure 1 Removing the Right End Cover

Wear gioves or wrap a sheet ofpaper around the Neal faad when handltng it Do not touch the glass secbon of We Heal Rod Oil from fingers can cause damage to the rod If you fouch the Neal Rod, clean the rod wth him Remover on a iinl-freecloth 6. (Ftgure2) Remove the Heat Rod

Figure 1 Removing the Exit Sensor

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 10.7, REP 10.8

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 10.9 Thermostat


Parts List on PL 6.1 Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. Allow the Fuser to cool before performing the procedure.

1. 2.

1
Pull the spring and remove the Heat Rod

3.
4. 5. 6.

Remove the Document Cover Assembly. Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10.1). Remove the Paper Guide ( REP 10.10). Remove the Heat Roll ( REP 10.2). ( Figure 1): Remove the Thermostat.

1
Remove the screws

2
Figure 2 Removing the Heat Rod Remove the Heat Rod Spring

3
Remove th Thermosta

Figure 1 Removing the Thermostat

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES
4-97

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 10.8,REP 1 0 . 9

manuals4you.com

REP 10.10 Paper Guide


Parts List on PL 6.1 Removal

REP 10.11 Stripper Fingers


Parts List on PL 6.1 Removal

WARNING
Switch off t h e Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. Allow the Fuser to coo/ before performing t h e procedure.
1. 2.

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Pilatve~ Cord. Allow tho Fusaa t o coo9 before performing the procedure. 1 Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2.

Remove the Document Cover Assembly. Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10.1). ( Figure 1): Remove the Paper Guide.

3. 4.

3. 4.

Remove the Rear Cover. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 30 1) Remove the Paper Gu~de ( REP 10 10)

NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary.

1
2
Remove the Paper Guide Remove the screw

5.

( Figure 1): Remove the Right End Cover and open the assembly.

I
Remove the screws (2)

3
Remove the Right End Cover

2
Remove the screw

SKY017N

SKY016N

Figure 1 Removing the Right End Cover


6.

Figure 1 Removing the Paper Guide

(Figure 2): Remove the Stripper Fingers.

Repairs and Adjustments

REP 10.10, REP 10.11

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 10.12 Fuser Gate


2
Rotate the Stripper Finger out of the hole

Parts List on PL 6.2 Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. Allow The Fuseir ta cool before performing the procedure. 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly. 2. Remove the Rear Cover. 3. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10.1). 4. Remove the Paper Guide ( REP 10.10).
NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary
5.

1
Disconnect spring

( Figure 1): Remove the Right End Cover.

1
Remove the screws (2)

3
Remove the Right End Cover

n
Figure 2 Removing the Stripper Fingers

2
Remove the screw

SKY017N

Figure 1 Removing the Right End Cover


6.

(Figure 2): Remove the Fuser Gate

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 10.11, REP 10.12


manuals4you.com

Remove the E-ring

Figure 2 Removing the Fuser Gate

Repairs and Adjustments

4/00

REP 10.12

4-1 00

Workcentre XD SERIES

REP 14.5 Control Console


Parts List on PL 1,1 Removal

REP 14.7 Output Tray


Parts List on PL 1.I Removal

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Raise the Document Cover Assembly and open the Front Door CAUTION Take care not I s damage fire ribbon cable and the harness connected to the Control Consoie PWB. ( Figure I): Remove the Control Console 2
1.

WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect t h e Pvfler Cord.
Remove the following: a. PaperTray(Pt4.1) b. Document Cover Assembly

Carefully remove the Control Console by rotating the top out and downward

4 Disconnect the harness connector

c. Rear Cover d. Top Left Cover 2. Remove the screw located on the left side of the Output Tray. 3. Pry the tray away from the Main Power Switch using a flat-bladed screwdriver. 4. Release the locking tab which is located in the front left corner of the Output Tray. 5. (Viewed from the Top) Remove the Output Tray by rotating it counterclockwise.

Remove the screws.

1
Remove the screws

Figure 1 Removing the Control Console

,, Inn

Repairs and Adjustments

Workcentre XD SERIES

manuals4you.com

Notes:

Repairs and Adjustments

4/00

4-102

Workcentre XD SERIES

ADJ 5.1 SDFIDSDF Skew


Purpose
The purpose IS to correct a 1 to 2mm skew that IS caused by mlsallgnment of the SDF Assembly or the DSDF Assembly relatlve to the body of the cop~erlpr~nter.

4.

Run a copy from the SDFIDSDF to verify that the skew problem is corrected. If the problem is not corrected, repeat the adjustment procedure.

Check
1 2 3 Make a 100% copy of the test pattern 82E12130 on the SDF or DSDF Carefully allgn the lead edge of the test pattern 82E12130 w~th the reglstrat~on gu~de and make a 100% copy on the Document Glass a Compare the coples If skew IS present and IS the same on both coples, go to the Sectlon 3 Image Quailly Spec!licat~ans

If a 1 to 2mm skew IS present only on the copy made on the SDF or DSDF, perform the adjustment below

Adjustment
1

(Figure 1) Open the SDFIDSDF Assembly and locate the two screws that secure the assembly to the r~ght hlnge

locations

Figure 1 Adjusting SDFIDSDF skew


2. 3. Loosen the screws and move the SDFIDSDF Assembly l m m toward the front or rear of the machlne to remove the skew. Tighten the screws.

Repairs and Adjustments WorkCentre XD SERIES

ADJ 5.6

manuals4you.com

ADJ 6.1 Copy Density (Exposure)


Purpose
The purpose is to set the exposure level so that the correct density is produced.

a. b. c.

If the ,208 line pair is just visible and the .10 line pair is not visible, the exposure is correct. If the .20B line pair is not visible, decrease the exposure. If the .10 line pair is visible, increase the exposure.

Check
1.

10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 for the Toner Saver mode.

Clean the Optics and the Document Glass. Set the magnification to 100%. Make five copies of Side A of the standard test pattern. ( Figure 1): Check the fifth copy. a. b. c. If the .20B line pair is just visible and the . I 0 line pair is not visible, the exposure is correct. If the .20B line pair is not visible, decrease the exposure. If the .10 line pair is visible, increase the exposure.

Adjustment
1.
2. Enter Diagnostic Code 46-1 and adjust the mode(s) identified in the check as requiring adjustment. Adjust the Text mode. a. b. c. d. Select Text. Place the Test Pattern as described in the check. Press the Start button. A copy is made. Decrease the number to increase the exposure (copy becomes lighter) and press the Start button. Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required. e. lncrease the number to decrease the exposure (copy becomes darker) and press the Start button. * Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required. Select Auto. Place the Test Pattern as described in the check. Press the Start button. A copy is made. d. Decrease the number to increase the exposure (copy becomes lighter) and press the Start button. Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required. e. lncrease the number to decrease the exposure (copy becomes darker) and press the Start button. Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required.

2. 4.

3. Set the Exposure to the Text mode.


5.

3.

Adjust the Auto mode. a. b.

1' '

~@1[
-.
& ,

.-

*-, 111 ? % ! ; : p : ':

: , " , " , " ,


% -.

: ;: : : : : : = - llt = --=--=^ _ a _ =

: Ill ze

:m ;":F:

.m n

c.

1@jl= =.
=

Z%y:
'Irp^l -7zd

ill -m n * , Ill =,:=nT-=i E a / , , ,=

= : ; : z :
::: r

4.

Adjust the Photo mode. a. b. c. d. Select Photo. Place the Test Pattern as described in the check. Press the Start button. A copy is made. Decrease the number to increase the exposure (copy becomes lighter) and press the Start button. Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required. e. lncrease the number to decrease the exposure (copy becomes darker) and press the Start button. Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required.

:zy

a ;

Ill =

.m L:%y
~ E S -

2 ill = ? ! : ; : :

gs Fiogr,

,,,

,&*<

., =r::IIl::;:
s:
I 7

- I!

; F n r r i C I

,c a,:"

IIt

SKY201 N

Figure 1 Checking the Exposure on the Copy


6. 7. 8. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the Auto mode. Set the Exposure to the Photo mode. Make five copies of Side A of the standard test pattern. Check the fifth copy.
5.

Adjust the Toner Saver mode. a. b. Select Toner Saver. Place the Test Pattern as described in the check.

9.

Repairs and Adjustments

ADJ 6.1

Workcentre XD SERIES

c. d.

Press the Start button A copy is made. Decrease the number to increase the exposure (copy becomes lighter) and press the Start button.

ADJ 6.2 LensICCD Module


Purpose
The purpose is to position the LensJCCD Module at the factory-specified setting

e.

6.

Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required. Increase the number to decrease the exposure (copy becomes darker) and press the Start button. Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required. Exit Diagnostics.

Adjustment
CAUTION
Only the mounliw screws shown below are to be utiiized by the Service Representative. The

module is available oniy as an assembly and must not be disassembled


NOTE: Example: Lens Unit Number is -2.8. lnstall the edge of the Lens/CCD Module approximately three 11nesln the negative dlrecfion from the Reference Line Example. Lens Unit Number IS 0 Install the edge of the Lens/CCD Module exactly on the Reference Llne
1.

(Figure 1): Install the module so that the Lens Adjustment Plate is aligned with the lines on the Base Plate according to the number written on the Lens Adjusting Plate.

Lens Adjusting Plate

(-) Direction Reference Line (0)

(+) Direction
Mounting Screws

Figure 1 Adjusting the LensICCD Module

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

ADJ 6.1, ADJ 6.2


manuals4you.com

ADJ 6.7 Image Distortion (Horizontal and Vertica!)


Purpose
The purpose is to correct image distortion by changing the parallelism of the mirrors (Exposure Lamp Carriage and Half-Rate Carriage).

Check
1.

( F i g u r e 1 ) : Make a Test Pattern for the check and adjustment by drawing a rectangle on a sheet of 8-112'' X 14" (84) paper. Ensure that the corners are square.

mm .- l
.
Ill

"IDE"

-" h.

l j i s l i -. =. ..
2.

.-

"iF...,.cl O, mm - = = =. : : : :: Ill : Ez ;g r:; -= _ - --_.= I


r,"9.m7
7 n

qcs"-=e

h a

.
^

iE elln
>11*

'TF""=-8

[@a[

Figure 1 Making the Test Pattern

( F i g u r e 2 ) : Make several copies of the Test Pattern. a. If the copies look like the Document, the check is good. If the copies look like A or B, perform the Horizontal Image Distortion Adjustment. b.

Loosen the screws

Figure 3 Loosening the Exposure Lamp Carriage Screws

3.

( Figure 4): Rotate the Scan Drive Gear until the Half-Rate Carriage comes in contact with the Positioning Brackets. a. If contact is equal on both sides, the adjustment is good. b. If there is no contact on one side, continue with the adjustment.

Document

COPY A

Figure 2 Checking the Copies

Adjustment
HORIZONTAL IMAGE DISTORTION
1.
2.

Remove the Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1). ( Figrrre 3):Loosen the screws on the Exposure Lamp Carriage

Repairs and Adjustments

ADJ 6.7

Half-Rate Carriage Posltionlng Bracket Pos~tlon~ng

Loosen the setscrews Scan Cable Hub Rotate the gear

SKY074F

Figure 5 Loosening the Setscrews on the Scan Cable Hub


5.

( Figure 6): Without moving the Scan Cable Hub Shaft, rotate the Hub until the Half-Rate Carriage makes contact with the Positioning Bracket.

Figure 4 Checking the Contact of the Half-Rate Carriage


4.

Half-Rate Carriag

( Figure 5): Loosen the setscrews on the Scan Cable Hub on the side where there was no contact.

2
Tighten the setscrews

"I
Rotate the Hu

Figure 6 Aligning the Half-Rate Carriage


6.
Repeat steps 3 through 5 untll the parallel~smof the Half-Rate Carnage adjusted.
IS

properly

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

ADJ 6.7
manuals4you.com

( Figure 7): With the Half-Rate Carriage against the Positioning Brackets, move the Exposure Lamp Carriage into contact with the frame. Hold a straightedge firmly against the frame and ensure that the front and rear tabs are parallel with and do not protrude beyond the frame, then tighten the mounting screws.

2.

( Figure 9): Loosen the mounting screws of the Half-Rate Carriage Rail to set the balance.

Front and rear tabs contact straightedge

rail

1
Loosen the screws

3
NOTE: Use a straightedge to ensure that the front and rear tabs are aligned parallel to the frame before tightening the screws.

Tighten the screws

Figure 9 Aligning the Half-Rate Carriage Rail

3.
4.

Reassemble the Copier and repeat the check. Check lmage Magnification (ADJ 6.8).

Tighten the screws

Figure 7 Aligning the Half-Rate Carriage VERTICAL IMAGE DISTORTION 1. ( Figure 8): Correction is made for Vertical lmage Distortion when the copy of the Test Pattern looks like the following figure. If all corners are well-formed right angles, no further adjustment is required, '

1
Correction required to balance the distortion

\ Change the height of the left side of the rail

Change the height of the right side of the rail

Figure 8 Evaluating the Copies

Repairs and Adjustments

ADJ 6.7

Workcentre XD SERIES

ADJ 6.8 Image Magnification


Purpose
The purpose is to provide the correct vertical and horizontal magnification.

Check
1.
2

Make a 100% copy of S~de B of the Standard Test Pattern. The magnlflcat~on of a 100% copy should be w ~ t h ~ 1n 0% of the or~glnal slze In the vert~cal and hor~zontal d~rect~ons

Adjustment
MAGNIFICATION (Front to Rear) Code 48-1 1 Enter D~agnost~c Press the Exposure Mode button until the Text lamp IS Ilt 2. To change the rnagn~flcat~on, press the Copy Quant~ty buttons a. To increase the magnification, increase the number. b. To decrease the magnification, decrease the number. c. Press the Clear button. MAGNIFICATION (Lead Edge to Trail Edge) 1. Enter Diagnostic Code 48-1. 2. Press the Exposure Mode button until the Photo lamp is lit. 3. To change the magnification, press the Copy Quantity buttons. a. To increase the magnification, increase the number. b. To decrease the magnification, decrease the number. c. Press the Clear button. 4. Repeat the check.

Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES

ADJ 6.8

manuals4you.com

ADJ 8.2 Lead Edge Deletion


Purpose
The purpose is to set the Lead Edge Deletion to within specification.

ADJ 8.3 Trail Edge Deietion


Purpose
The purpose is to set the Trail Edge Deletion to within specification.

Check
1. 2.
Place the test pattern 82P524 (NASG and XCL) or 82P523 (XE) on the Document Glass with Side A down and the lead edge against the registration edge. Make two copies at 100% magnification and discard the first copy. Check that the Lead Edge Deletion of the second copy is 1 to 4 mrn. Enter Diagnostic Code 50-1. Press the Exposure button until the Text lamp is lit. NOTE: Each increment to the Copy Quantity display changes the deletion by 0.1 mm. 3. To change the Lead Edge Deletion, press the Copy Quantity buttons. a. b. c.
4.

Check
1.
2. Make a copy with the Document Cover Assembly open (Dark Dusting). Check that the Trail Edge Deletion is a maximum of 4 mrn. Enter Diagnostic Code 50-1. Press the Exposure button until the Auto, Text, and Photo lamps are lit. NOTE: Each increment to the Copy Quantity display changes the deletion by 0.1 mm. 3. To change the Trail Edge Deletion, press the Copy Quantity buttons. a. b. c. 4. To increase the deletion, increase the number. To decrease the deletion, decrease the number. Press the Clear button.

Adjustment
1.
2.

3.
1. 2.

Adjustment

-.

To increase the deletion, increase the number. To decrease the deletion, decrease the number. Press the Clear button.

Repeat the check.

Repeat the check.

Repairs and Adjustments

4/00

ADJ 8.2, ADJ 8.3

4-110

Workcentre XD SERIES

AD9 8.4 Lead Edge Registration


Purpose
The purpose is to set the Lead Edge Registration to specification
NOTE: Th~s adjustment advances or delays the Reglstratlon Roller ON timing

ADJ 8.5 SDWDSDF head Edge Registration


Purpose
The purpose is to set the SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration to specification.
NOTE: This adjustment advances or delays the document scan.

Check
1 2 3 4 5 6
7

Check
1. 2. 3. 4. Enter Diagnostic Code 50-[Ol]. Press the lmage Quality button until the Text lamp is lit. Record the value that is displayed for Lead Edge Deletion. Press the Copy Quantity buttons and set the Lead Edge Deletion value to zero (0). Press the Clear button to store the value and exit diagnostics. Place the test pattern 82E12130 in the SDFIDSDF with Side A facing up and the lead edge against the Paper Gate. Make two copies at 100% magnification and discard the first copy. Check that the SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration on the second copy is 0 +I- .2 mm. Power the copierlprinter Off and then On. Enter the Diagnostic Code 50-[I]. Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Text lamps are lit. Record the setting value that is displayed on the Control Panel.
NOTE: Each increment of 10 to the Copy Quantity display changes the lead edge registration by 1.0 mm. NOTE: Do not adjust the registration with the Copy Quantity "ones" button. Pressing the "ones" button while performing the adjustment procedure will change the Lead Edge Deletion only, not the Lead Edge Registration.

Enter Dlagnostlc Code 50-[Oil Press the lmage Quality button untll the Text lamp IS Ilt Record the value that
IS

displayed for Lead Edge Deletlon

Press the Copy Quantity buttons and set the Lead Edge Deletlon value to zero (0) Press the Clear button to store the value and exlt dlagnostlcs Place test pattern 82P524 (NASG and XCL) or 82P523 (XE) on the Document Glass with Slde A down and the lead edge agalnst the registratlon edge Make two copies at 100% magnlflcatlon and dlscard the flrst copy Check that the lead edge registratlon of the second copy Enter D~agnostlc Code 50-1 Press the lmage Quallty button untll the Auto lamp is lit Record the value that dlsplays on the Control Panel
NOTE: Each increment of 10 to the Copy Quantity display changes the lead edge registration by 1.0 mm. NOTE: Do not adjust the registration by pressing the Copy Quantity "ones" button. Pressing the ''ones'' button while performing the adjustment procedure will change the Lead Edge Deletion only, not the Lead Edge Registration.
IS

5.
6.
7.

8 1 2 3

0 +I- 2mm

8. 1.
2.

Adjustment

Adjustment

3.
4.

4.

To change the Lead Edge Registration, press the Copy Quantity "tens" button. a. To move the image toward the lead edge of the paper, increase the number. b. To move the image away from the lead edge of the paper, decrease the number. c. Press the Start button to run a copy at the new setting. Check the lead edge registration on the copy. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the Lead Edge Registration is correct. Press the Clear button to exit diagnostics. Perform the Lead Edge Deletion adjustment (ADJ 8.2) and reset the in,itial value that is displayed (zero) to the setting that was recorded at in the Check section.

5.

5.
6.

7.

6.
7.

8.

To change the SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration, press the Copy Quantity "tens" button. a. To move the image toward the lead edge of the paper, decrease the number. b. To move the image away from the lead edge of the paper, increase the number. Press the Start button to run a copy at the new setting. c. Check the SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration on the copy. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration is correct. Press the Clear button to exit diagnostics. Perform the Lead Edge Deletion adjustment (ADJ 8.2) and reset the initial value that is displayed (zero) to the setting that was recorded in the Check section.

8. 9.

Workcentre XD SER~ES

4/00 4-1 11

Repairs and Adjustments

ADJ 8.4, ADJ 8.5

manuals4you.com

ADJ 9.1 Developer Bias


Purpose
The purpose is to adjust the developer bias voltage

ADJ 9.2 Grid Bias


Purpose
The purpose
IS

to adjust the g r ~ d b~as voltage

Adjustment

Adjustment

WARMING
Switch off the Fdairs Power SrrsEtch3and disronnacl: the Power Cord 1ijiefsa.e Insertisvg the meter lead probes oriks the Power Suppiy PiVB, 1. Set the digital multi meter range to 400 VDC.
NOTE: An alternate hookup of the meter lead probes is at the rear of the machine. With the back cover off, connect the positive lead to P/J 9 pin 8. Connect the negative lead to chassis ground.

WARNING
Swiiil~cr~ o t the ~ Main Po~berSx.ril~sh, and d;scsiar;aci the Powe~Card betcre Inserting Pin

m t e r lesd probes on18 the Fouer Stspgll $Z%UB,


NOTE: Set the LOW output voltage first Set the HlGH output voltage last

1. 2.

Set the d ~ g ~ tmultl a l meter range to 4000 VDC ( F ~ g ~ iI). i e Connect the posltlve lead to connector pin CN11-3

2.

( Figure I ) : Connect the positive lead to connector pin CN10-I

1 Connect the Meter leads

CNIO, pin 3 (left side)

Figure 1 Adjusting the Developer Bias Voltage

3.
4. 5.

Connect the negative lead to CN10-2. Enter Diagnostic Code 25-1. When Start is pressed, the Developer Bias is present for 30 seconds. Adjust VR-121 for a voltage of -380 +I-20 VDC.
Figure 1 Adjusting the Grid Bias Voltage

3. 4.

Connect the negative lead to the Chassis Ground. Enter Diagnostic Code 8-3. Adjust VR-141 for a LOW output voltage of -420 +I-20 VDC. Enter Diagnostic Code 8-2. Adjust VR-142 for a HlGH output voltage of -580 +I-20 VDC.

5. 6.
7.

Repairs and Adjustments

ADJ 9.1, ADJ 9.2

5 Parts List
...
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... Subsystem Information .................................................................................................. Symbology ..................................................................................................................

PACKAGING. ACCESSORIES AND CONSUMABLES


PL 8.2 DRUM AND TONER CARTRIDGES ...........................

. . .................................

5-36 5-37 5-38 5-39 5-40 5-41 5-42

COVERS
PL PL PL PL 1.1 COVERS ........................................................................................................... 1.2 DOCUMENT GLASS COVER (XD10011021104) ....................... . . ................. 1.3 CONTROL CONSOLE (XD100110211041120F).................... . . .......................... 1.4 SIDE DOOR .......................... . . ..........................................................................

DOCUMENT HANDLING
PL 9.1 A SDFIDSDF ASSEMBLY ......................... . . ....................................................... PL 9.1B SDFIDSDF ASSEMBLY .................................................................................... PL 9.2 SDFIDSDF FEED ASSEMBLY ............................................................................ PL 9.3 SDF TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY .......................................................................... PL 9.4 SDFIDSDF TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY (XD155DFND130DF) ........................... Part Number Index ......................................................................................................

"- .

DRlVES
PL 2.1 DRIVES AND MID-FRAME COMPONENTS .................................................... PL 2.2 MAIN DRIVES ASSEMBLY ..............................................................................

OPTICS
PL 3.1 PL 3.2 PL 3.3 PL 3.4 OPTICS FRAME (1 OF 2) .................................................................................. OPTICS FRAME (2 OF 2) ................................................................................... LASER ASSEMBLY ............................................................................................. HALF RATE CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY .............................................................

PAPER SUPPLY
PL 4.1 250 SHEET TRAY ...............................................................................................

PAPER FEEDING
PL 5.1 PAPER FEEDING AND DRIVES ......................................................................... PL 5.2 SINGLE SHEET BYPASS .................................................................................. PL 5.3 SINGLE BYPASS COVER .................................................................................. PL 5.4 MULTISHEET BYPASS COVER ......................................................................... PL 5.5 MULTISHEET BYPASS FEEDER ...................................................................... PL 5.6 MULTISHEET BYPASS TRAY .................................... . . .................................... PL 5.7 TRAY 2 FRAME ASSEMBLY .............................................................................. PL 5.8 TRAY 2 PAPER FEED ASSEMBLY ....................................................................

COPY TRANSPORTATION AND FUSING


PL 6.1 FUSING (1 OF 2) ................................................................................................. PL 6.2 FUSING (2 OF 2) ................................................................................................. PL 6.3 OUTPUT TRANSPORT .......................................................................................

ELECTRICAL
PL 7.1A ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS (PART 1 OF 2) ................................................ PL 7.1 B ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS (PART 2 OF 2) ................................................ PL 7.2 DRUM CARTRIDGE CONTACT HOUSING ..................................................... PL 7.3 TRANSFERIDETACK COROTRON ASSEMBLY ............................................. PL 7.4 HARNESS'S ........................................................................................................

PACKAGING, ACCESSORIES AND CONSUMABLES


..

PL 8.1A PACKAGING AND ACCESSORIES .................................................................

PACKAGING AND ACCESSORIES (XD155DF ONLY)


PL 8.18 PACKAGING AND ACCESSORIES (XD155DF ONLY)

.................................

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

manuals4you.com

Parts List

4/00

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

5-2

introduction
Overview
The Parts List section identifies all part numbers and the corresponding location of all spared subsystem components. Abbreviation REF: SCSl WI Refer to

Table 1 Meaning Small Computer Systems Interface With Without Table 2 Operating Companies Abbreviation Meaning Americas Operations United States Marketing Operations United States Operations Xerox Canada Limited Xerox Europe

Organization
Parts Lists corresponds g to an item number In the related Each Item number in the part number l ~ s t ~ n ~llustrat~on. All the parts in a glven subsystem of the mach~ne w~ll be located In the same ~llustratlon or In a series of associated ~llustrations. Electrical Connectors and Fasteners This section contains the illustrations and descriptions of the plugs, jacks, and fasteners used in the machine. A part number listing of the connectors is included.

W/O

...

"

Common Hardware The common hardware is listed in alphabetical order by the letter or letters used to identify each item in the part number listing and in the illustrations. Dimensions are in millimeters unless otherwise identified. Part Number index This index lists all the spared parts in the machine in numerical order. Each number is followed by a reference to the parts list on which the part may be found.

Symbology
Symbology used in the Parts List section is identified in the Symbology section.

Service Procedure Referencing


If a part or assembly has an associated repair or adjustment procedure, the procedure number will be listed at the end of the part description in the parts lists e.g. (REP 5.1, ADJ 5.3)

Other information
Abbreviations Abbreviations are used in the parts lists and the exploded view illustrations to provide information in a limited amount of space. The following abbreviations are used in this manual: Table 1 Abbreviation A3 A4 A5 AD AWG EM! GB KB M Meaning 297 x 420 M~ll~meters 210 x 297 Mill~meters 148 x 210 M~llrmeters Auto Duplex Amer~can W~re Gauge Electro Magnetic lnduct~on G~ga Byte K~lo Byte

I 1 MOD
RIE

1I Millimeters

I Maaneto Optical Drive

1
1

I Part List
I Part of I
I

I Reduction/Enlaraement
Parts List

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

introduction manuals4you.com

Subsystem Information
Use of the Term "Assembly"
The term "assembly" will be used for items in the part number listing that include other itemized parts in the part number listing. When the word "assembly is found in the part number listing, there will be a corresponding item number on the illustrations followed by a bracket and a listing of the contents of the assembly.

Brackets
A bracket is used when an assembly or kit is spared, but is not shown in the illustration. The item number of the assembly or kit precedes the bracket; the item numbers of the piece parts follow the bracket.

Tag
The notation "W/Tagm in the parts description indicates that the part configuration has been updated. Check the change Tag index in the General lnformation section of the Service Data for the name and purpose of the modification. In some cases, a part or assembly may be spared in two versions: with the Tag and without the Tag. In those cases, use whichever part is appropriate for the configuration of the machine on which the part is to be installed. If the machine does not have a particular Tag and the only replacement part available is listed as "WTTag," install the Tag kit or all of the piece parts. The Change Tag Index tells you which kit or piece parts you need. Whenever you install a Tag kit or all the piece parts that make up a Tag, mark the appropriate number on the Tag matrix.

Parts List

Subsystem Information

4/00 5-4

Reissue

Workcenter XD Series

Svmbaloav
A Tag number within a circle pointing to an item number shows that the part has been changed by the tag number within the circle (Figure 1). Information on the modification is in the Change Tag Index

--

A Tag number within a circle having a shaded bar and pointing to an item number shows that the configuration of the part shown is the configuration before the part was changed by the Tag number within the circle (Figure 2,,

Figure 2 Without Tag Symbol Figure 1 With Tag Symbol

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

Symbology
manuals4you.com

A tag number within a circle with no apex shows that the entire drawing has been changed by the tag number within the circle (Figure 3). Information on the modification is in the Change Tag Index.

A tag number within a circle with no apex and having a shaded bar shows that the entire drawing was the configuration before being changed by the tag number within the circle (Figure 4).

Figure 3 Entire Drawing With Tag Symbol

Figure 4 Entire Drawing Without Tag Symbol

Parts List

Reissue

Symbology

Workcenter XD Series

PL 1.WGOVERS
Item 1

2 3 4

Part 21\11566 2N1525

50N259 50N230

5 6

152N1630

Description FRONT DOOR (XE) FRONT DOOR (USO/XCL) OUTPUT TRAY (USOIXCL) (REP 14.7) SCREW (3x8) TRAY EXTENSION (XE) TRAY EXTENSION (USOIXCL) SCREW (4x12) CONTROL CONSOLE (REP 14.5)
(REF: PL 1.3) CONTROL CONSOLE HARNESS HARNESS SCREW (3x8) TOP LEFT COVER INSTRUCTION LABEL DOCUMENT GLASS ASSEMBLY (USOIXCL) (REP 6.1) (XD1001102 ONLY) (XCL)(XD103F, XD105F, XD120F, XD125F, XDl30DF, XD155DF) (USO)(XD103F, XD105F, XD130DF, XD155DF) XD120F, XD125F, (XE) (REP 6.1) (XD100/102/104) REGISTRATION GUIDE CALIBRATION STRIP ADHESIVE STRIP DOCUMENT GLASS TOP RIGHT COVER (USOIXCL ONLY) TOP RIGHT COVER (XE ONLY) REAR COVER CAUTION LABEL LABEL SERVICE LABEL FAN GASKET OZONE FILTER DOCUMENT GLASS EDGE SDF WINDOW SDF GLASS CUSHION SMALL REAR COVER (XD120F,XD103F,XD105F) REAR SHIELD(XD103FI105F I120F/155DF/125F/130DF) FRONT SHIELD (XD103F/105F/120F/155DF I125Fl130DF) CUSHION (XDl55DF) TAPE (XD155DF)

7 8 9 10 11 12

90N138

90N144 90N140

13 14 15 16 17

90N139

1N299

2N1591 21\11729

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

53N142 1N300

38N274 38N275

30 31

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

PL 1.I
manuals4you.com

PL 1.2 DOCUMENT GLASS COVER (XD10011 021104)


Item

Part

1 2 3 4 5 6

21\11534 2N1526

Description REAR PIVOT ATTACHMENT DOCUMENT COVER DOCUMENT COVER CUSHION DOCUMENT ORGANIZER DOCUMENT COVER ASSEMBLY (W/ORGANIZER) (XD1001104) DOCUMENT COVER ASSEMBLY (WIO ORGANIZER) (XD102)

Parts List

Reissue

PL 1.2

Workcenter XD Series

PL 6.3 CONTROL CONSOLE


(XDI 001102/1041120F)
Item
1
-

Part
53N162 53N 163 53N165 53N166 53N172 53N176 53N170 53N175

Description
CONTROL BUTTON COVER (AO)(XE) (XD102) (USO) (XD104) (XE) (ACO) (XDI 00) (USO) (XD105F) (XD103F) (XD120F) (XD155DF) (USO) (XD102) (XE) (AO) CONTROL CONSOLE COVER START PRINT BUTTON CLEARISTOP BUTTON FUNCTION BUTTON (R) FUNCTION BUTTON (L) BOOK MODE SELECT BUTTON CONTROL CONSOLE PWB (XDI05F, XD103F) CONTROL CONSOLE PWB (XDl20F/155DF/125F I130DF) CONTROL CONSOLE PWB (XDl04)(XE ONLY) CONTROL CONSOLE PWB (XD1001102) GROUNDING SPRING SCREW (3x8) CONTROL CONSOLE SURROUND

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3N673
-

140N5223 140N5206 14bN5641 140N5107

9 10 11

21\11593

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

Pb 1 . 3

manuals4you.com

.4 SlDE DOOR
Part

Description
SIDE DOOR (USOIXCL) SIDE DOOR (XE) SIDE DOOR LATCH LATCH SPRING HINGE GUIDE GROUNDING PLATE GROUNDING SPRING SCREW (3x6) SCREW (3x6) INNER PAPER GUIDE SCREW (3x10) PRESSURE SPRING GROUND WIRE GROUNDING SPRING PRESSURE SPRING SHAFT E-RING UPPER ROLLER TRANSFERIDETACK COROTRON (REP 9.2) SCREW (3x8) (XD155DF) DUPLEX DRIVE GEAR (XD155DF) DUPLEX DRIVE GEAR A (XD155DF) DUPLEX DRIVE ROLLER (XD155DF) (REP 5.28) DUPLEX PRESSURE SPRING (XD155DF)

21\11730 2N1731 3N668 9N978

9N964 152N1635

9N962

22E22060 19N415

7N750 7N751 22N1002 9N1027

Parts List

Reissue

PL 1.4

Workcenter XD Series

PL 2.mBRlVES AND MID-FRAME COMPONENTS


Item 1 2 3
4 5

Part 22N926

22N925

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

23N596 23N634

127N972

127N971 127K30260

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

152N1660 152N1623

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

127N996

Description EXIT ROLLER (REP 8.9) BEARING LOWER TRANSPORT ROLLER (REP 8.11) PULLEY (22T) EXIT DRIVE BELT DUPLEX DRIVE BELT (XD155DFlXD130DF) CABLE TIE COUPLING SPRING TONER MOTOR (MOT 4) (REP 9.1) SCREW (3x10) SCREW (3x30) VENTILATION FAN (MOT 3) (REP 10.6) VENTILATION FAN (MOT 3) TRANSFER COROTRON CONTACT HOUSING BIAS CONTROL PLATE SCREW (3x6) TRANSFER COROTRON PLATE SCREW (3x6) BIAS CONTROL HARNESS TRANSFER COROTRON HARNESS MANUAL EXIT DRIVE BELT (REP 8.10) CENTER FRAME MANUAL EXIT KNOB FUSER JAM SENSOR HARNESS (230V) FUSER HEAT ROD HARNESS (1OOV) HARNESS GUIDE GUIDE PIN DVSHARNESS SCREW (3x6) SCREW (3x8) SCREW (4x12) DUPLEX MOTOR MOUNTING BRACKET (XD155DF ONLY) DUPLEX SPACER (XD155DF ONLY) SCREW (3x10) (XD155DF) SCREW (3x6) (XD155DF) EXlT DRIVE MOTOR (MOT5) (XD155DF) (REP 5.30) SHIELD (XD155DF)

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

manuals4you.com

PL 2.2 MAIN DRIVES ASSEMBLY


Item Bart

1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

127N969

Description MAIN DRIVE ASSEMBLY (REP


8.12) MAIN DRIVE MOTOR (MOT 1) (REP 4.1) SPRING GEAR PULLEY GEAR (28T) GEAR (46116T) GEAR (30115T) DRIVE GEAR ASSEMBLY GEAR (37115T) GEAR (68126T) COUPLING GEAR (34T) RATCHET GEAR (21T) RATCHET GEAR (28T) SPRING GEAR (55119T) GEAR (33120115T) GEAR (20T) GEAR (31117T) MAIN DRIVE BRACKET SCREW (3x4) SOLENOID REGISTRATION ROLL (SOL 3) (REP 8.2) SPRING PAWL SOLENOID PAPER FEED (SOL 1) (REP 8.1) SOLENOID PAPER FEED (XD155DF) PAWL SCREW (4x6) MAIN MOTOR HARNESS

121N401

121N400 121N421

26 27 28

152N1633

Parts List

Reissue

PL 2 . 2

Workcenter XD Series

Pk 3.WPTICS FRAME (1 OF 2)
Item 1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

Part

62N139

7N694 127K30270

Description SCAN CABLE HALF RATE CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY EXPOSURE LAMP CARRIAGE (REP 6.2) CABLE CLAMP SCREW (3x5) EXPOSURE LAMP HARNESS SCREW PULLEY STUD PLATE PULLEY PULLEY E-RING OPTICS FRAME SCREW (3x8) SCAN RAIL (REAR) SCAN RAIL (FRONT) SCREW E-RING SCAN DRIVE GEARIPULLEY MOTOR TENSION SPRING SCAN DRIVE MOTOR (MOT 2) (REP 6.3) SCAN DRIVE MOTOR MOUNTING
PLATE E-RING BEARING SPRING PIN (3MM) SCAN DRIVE PULLEY SCAN DRIVE BELT SCREW (3x4) SCAN CABLE HUB SCREW (4x6) SCAN CABLE DRIVE SHAFT BEARING WASHER OPTICS FRAME ASSEMBLY (REP 6.6)

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

PL 3.1
manuals4you.com

Pb 3.2 OPTICS FRAME (2OF 2)


Item
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

Part

152N1632

62N141

140N5112
-

30 31

Description SCREW (3x8) LENS COVER EXPOSURE LAMP HARNESS HARNESS GUIDE CCD HARNESS SCREW LENSICCD MODULE (REP 6.5) SCREW(3X8) SCAN HOME SENSOR (Q5) DOCUMENT GLASS CUSHION RIBBON GUIDE PROTECTOR SHEET DISCHARGE BRUSH OPTICS FRAME GUIDE UPPER DUPLEX PAPER GUIDE CAUTION LABEL CCDHARNESSCOVER CCD PWB COVER FERRITE HOLDER LOWER SHEET SCREW (4x12) FERRITE CUSHION SDF LEFT HINGE GUIDE SDF RIGHT HINGE GUIDE SCREW (3x8) (XD120F) WIRE BAND (XD120F) BAND (PLTIM) (XD120F) WIRE HOLDER (LWS-1M) (XD120F) CUSHION (XD155DF) CRlP HOLDER (XD155DF)

Parts List

Reissue

PL 3 . 2

Workcenter XD Series

PL 3.3 LASER ASSEMBLY


Item
1 2 3

Part

152N1718

152N1692

Description SCREW (3x6) LASER HARNESS COVER LASER HARNESS (XDI 00110211041103Fl 105Fl120Fl155F) (WIO [TAG 1I) LASER HARNESS
(XD10011021104/103F/ 105Fi120F1155F) (W/[TAG 11) LASER HARNESS (XD125F/XD130DF) TIE WRAP LASER MODULE (XDI 00110211041103F/ 105F/120F/155F) (W/O [TAG 11) LASER MODULE (XD100/102/104/103F/ 105F/120F/155F) (W/[TAG 11) LASER MODULE (XD125FlXD130DF) SPRING SCREW SPIRAL WRAP (XD155DF)

4 5

62N142

62N173

6 7 8

Reissue Workcenter.XD Series

Parts List

PL 3.3
manuals4you.com

PL 3.4 HALF RATE CARRlAGE ASSEMBLY


item 1 2 3
4

Part

5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1ON64

Description LIGHT SHIELD HALF RATE CARRIAGE SCREW (4x6) PULLEY GUIDE SCREW (4x6)
SLIDE BUTTON SCREW PULLEY BRACKET (REAR) CUSHION (REAR) MIRROR CLIP MIRROR PULLEY BRACKET (FRONT) CUSHION (FRONT) HALF RATE CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY

19E26730 62N140

Parts List

Reissue

PL 3 . 4

Workcenter XD Series

PL 4.1 250 SHEET TRAY


Item 1 2 3
4

Part

5 6

Description PAPER PRESSURE PLATE RETARD PAD PRESSURE PLATE LOCK PAPER SIZE GUIDE FRONT PAPER GUIDE FRONT PAPER SNUBBER E-RING LABEL SCREW (3x8) WASHER GEAR LOAD LABEL REAR PAPER GUIDE REAR PAPER SNUBBER LIFT SPRING TRAY SPRING SPRING PLATE RELEASE TRAY FRAME LABEL 250 SHEET PAPER TRAY

Reissue Workcenter XB Series

4/00

Parts List

5-17

PL 4 . 1

manuals4you.com

PL 5.1 PAPER FEEDING AND DRIVES


Item 1
Part 140N5109

Description TRAY 1 PAPER FEED SENSOR (Ql) (REP 8.3) SENSOR ACTUATOR ACTUATOR SPRING SCREW (3x10) UPPER FRONT PAPER GUIDE E-RING LOWER REGISTRATION ROLLER (REP 8.13) BEARING CLUTCH GEAR (26T) CLUTCH SLEEVE CLUTCH SPRING SPRING PIN CLUTCH BOSS E-RING CLUTCH BOSS CLUTCH SPRING CLUTCH SLEEVE CLUTCH GEAR (29T) BEARING PAPER FEED ROLLER (REP 8.6) GEAR (33T) GEAR (21129T) GEAR (30T) GEAR SUPPORT BRACKET GROUNDING PLATE TRAY DETECT SWITCH (52) (REP 8.14) DRUM RESET SWITCH (S6) TRAY DETECT SWITCH HARNESS (REP 8.5) BASE FRAME RETARD PAD RETARD ARM LIFT SPRING RETARD SUPPORT PLATE SPRING (XD100/102) PAPER GUIDE SCREW (4x12) RETARD PAD (XDI 04) SCREW (3x8) SENSOR COVER D-RST HARNESS SCREW (3x12) FRONT LEVER SPRING FRONT LEVER PLATE WASHER GUIDE (XD155DF) SCREW (4x12) (XD120F) FIXING PLATE (XD120F) JOINT GEAR (XD120F) E-RING (XD120F)

Parts List

Reissue

PL 5.1

Workcenter XD Series

PL 5.2 SINGLE SHEET BYFaBSS


Item

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9

Part 22N933

Description SINGLE BYPASS ASSEMBLY GROUND WIRE TIE WRAP SCREW (3x6) PAPER FEED BRACKET GEAR (27T) E-RING SCREW 3x8) GEAR (16T)

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

22N932

140N5106

22E22060

22N930

SPRING PIN BUSHING TRANSPORT ROLLER (REP 8.7) BYPASS FRAME GROUNDING SPRING SCREW (3x6) ACTUATOR SPRING ACTUATOR SPRING SINGLE SHEET BYPASS FEED SENSOR ((22) (REP 8.4) DUPLEX UPPER GUIDE SINGLE BYPASS GUIDE (R) SINGLE BYPASS GUIDE (F) SCREW (3x6) BYPASS ROLL SINGLE BYPASS FRAME SPRING PAPER FEED GEAR SCREW (3x6) GROUNDING SPRING SCREW (3x6) GROUNDING SPRING SCREW (4x12) SINGLE BYPASS UPPER ASSEMBLY

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

PL 5.2 manuals4you.com

PL 5.3 SlNGLE BYPASS COVER


Item
1 2 3 4 5
6

Part 42E1430

Description
COROTRON CLEANER SCREW UPPERCOVER SIDE DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH (S3lS4) (24Vl5V) (REP 8.8) SCREW (2x16) SWITCH ACTUATOR CAUTION LABEL (XE)

110N783

Parts List

Ph 5.3

4/00

Reissue

5-20

Workcenter XD Series

PL 5.4 MULTISHEET BYPASS COVER


Item
1

Part 42E1430

Description COROTRON CLEANER SCREW UPPER COVER SIDE DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH (S3/S4) (24Vl5V) (REP 8.8) CAUTION LABEL (XE) SWITCH ACTUATOR

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

PL 5.4
manuals4you.com

PL 5.5 MULTISHEET BYPASS FEEDER


ltem 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42

Part
5E10560

22E20680

9E57550 5E9640

22N948

Description FEED ROLL (REP 8.15) E-RING GEAR (20T) ROLL SUPPORT RETARD ROLL (REP 8.1 6) SPRING PIN GEAR (16T) SHAFT BUSHING SUPPORT SCREW (3x8) UPPER GUIDE SCREW (3x6) GROUNDING SPRING CLUTCH BOSS FEED CLUTCH SPRING CLUTCH SLEEVE CLUTCH BOSS GEAR (27T) GEAR (20T) TIE WRAP GROUNDING WIRE SCREW (3x6) SCREW (3x6) SUPPORT PLATE CLUTCH SLEEVE CLUTCH SPRING CLUTCH BOSS MULTl BYPASS SOLENOID (SOL4) (REP 8.17) SOLENOID SPRING RATCHET ARM RATCHET ARM SPRING SCREW (3x8) FRAME SCREW (4x12) GATE SUPPORT FRAME ARM HINGE SPRING FEEDER ASSEMBLY

Parts List

Reissue

PL 5.5

Workcenter XD Series

PL 5.6 MULTISHEET BYPASS TRAY


Item
1 2 3 4

Part
50N231

Description
TRAY ASSEMBLY REAR GUIDE FRONT GUIDE TRAY COVER SPRING GEAR SCREW (3x6) TRAY BASE TRAY EXTENSION

5
6 7

8 9

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

PL 5.6
manuals4you.com

PL 5.7 TRAY 2 FRAME ASSEMBLY


item 1 2 3
4

Part

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

809E11980

22N970 9N1072 31N159 2N1559 21\11576

15 16 17

18
19

Description FRONT COVER SCREW (4x12) REAR COVER LEFT TRAY GUIDE SCREW (4x12) REAR TIE PLATE RUBBER FOOT RIGHT TRAY GUIDE TRANSPORT COVER SPRING TRANSPORT COVER IDLER ROLLER IDLER SPRING ARM LOWER SIDE DOOR (USOMCL) LOWER SIDE DOOR (XE) SCREW (4x8) SCREW (3x16) TRAY 2 FEED ASSEMBLY TRAY 2 HARNESS 250 CASSETTE ASSEMBLY

Parts List

Reissue

PL 5.7

Workcenter XD Series

PL 5.8 TRAY 2 PAPER FEED ASSEMBLY


Item 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Part
22N1029

Description
TRAY 2 TRANSPORT ROLLER (REP 8.23) BEARING (B-F5-13) E-RING DRIVE FRAME GEAR (20T) SPRING PIN CLUTCH BOSS CLUTCH SPRING CLUTCH SLEEVE CLUTCH GEAR (29T) (REP 8.24) GEAR (40) ARM SPRING TRAY 2 HARNESS TRAY 2 PAPER FEED SENSOR (Q7) (REP 8.20) ACTUATOR GROUND SPRING TRAY 2 PAPER FEED SOLENOID (SOL 2) (REP 8.22) SCREW (3x6) CLUTCH PAWL CLUTCH PAWL SPRING GEAR (1 8126T) GEAR (16T) TRAY 2 DETECT SWITCH (S5) (REP 8.21 ) TRAY 2 FEED ROLLER (REP 8.25) TRAY 2 FEED ASSEMBLY

809E12000

110E5370

121N411

7N742 809E12010

7E29490 110N817

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

PL 5.8
manuals4you.com

PL 6.1 FUSING ("sF 2)


Item 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Part

103N206 117N1312 115N284

Description PAPER GUIDE (REP 10.10)


RESISTOR (112 W) GROUND WIRE DISCHARGE BRUSH END COVER HEAT ROD SPRING (F) FUSER UPPER FRAME SCREW (3x6) THERMISTOR (RT1) (REP 10.4) SCREW (3x10) STRIPPER FINGER (REP 10.11) THERMOSTAT (REP 10.9) FUSER JAM SENSOR (Q3) (REP 10.5) HEAT ROD SPRING (R) END COVER (R) HARNESS (230V) FUSER ASSEMBLY HARNESS (1OOV) TIE WRAP RETAINING RING DRIVE GEAR (45T) BEARING HEAT ROLL (REP 10.2) HEAT ROD (230V) (REP 10.8) HEAT ROD (120V) (REP 10.8) SCREW FUSER ASSEMBLY (230V) (REP 10.1) FUSER ASSEMBLY (120V) (REP 10.1) ALTERNATE

24 ( 1 - 20, ITEM 1 ON PL6.2

130E7840

7N695 130E9190 140N5110

14 15 16

152N1661 152N1624

17 18 19 20 21 22

3E10140 7E14961 13E12780 22E23440 122N133 122N115

23 24

126N70 126N58 126N96

Parts List

Reissue

PL 6.1

Workcenter XD Series

PL 6.2 FUSING ( 2 OF 2 )
Itern 1
2

Part

Description
FUSER ASSEMBLY (PI0 PL 6.1 Item 24) E-RING FUSER GATE (REP 10.12) GATE SPRING (NOT SPARED) SCREW FRONT PAPER GUIDE SHEET FRONT PAPER GUIDE GROUNDING STRAP HIGH TEMP CAUTION LABEL SCREW (3x12) FUSER LOWER FRAME PRESSURE ROLL STRIPPER FINGERS PRESSURE ROLL ARM (F) PRESSURE ROLL (REP 10.3) WASHER PRESSURE SPRING PRESSURE ROLL BEARING PRESSURE ROLL ARM (R) HANDLE LABEL FUSER STRIPPER FINGER KIT (USO/XCL ONLY) FUSER STRIPPER ASSEMBLY (XE ONLY)

38N230 809E43360

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

31N166 22N924

9N1088 13E5110 311\1167

600K87880
1N305

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

PL 6.2
manuals4you.com

PL 6.3 OUTPUT TRANSPORT


Part

Description
UPPER EXIT ROLLER TENSION SPRING PWB INSULATOR EXlT SENSOR (Q4) (REP 10.7) SENSOR ACTUATOR EXlT GUIDE TENSION SPRING UPPER ROLLER GROUNDING SPRING CONTROL CONSOLE RIBBON CABLE FERRITE RETAINER FERRITE

Parts List

Reissue

Pb 6 . 3

Workcenter XD Series

PL 7.1A ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS (PART 1 OF 2)


item 1 2 3 4 5 Part

140N5114 140N5113 140N5210

Description SCREW (3x6) PWB COVER CONNECTOR CAP


GDI PWB GDI MEMORY PWB (4 MEG) GDI MEMORY PWB (6MEG) (XD155DF/XD130DF ONLY) (230V) CENTER FRAME HARNESS (1OOV) FUSERHARNESS MAIN PWB (REF PL7.1B ITEM 1) PWB MOUNTING BRACKET SCREW (3x10) SCREW (3x10) (230V) FUSER HEAT ROD HARNESS (120V) POWER SUPPLY PWB (120V) (PSl)(REP 1.2, ADJ 9.1) (XDl 00110211041125) (USOIXC) POWER SUPPLY PWB (120V) (XD120F1130DF1125F I105Fl103F/155DF) (USOIXC) POWER SUPPLY PWB (230V) (XD100110211041120F I1O3F)(XE) SCREW SCREW (4x12) STIFFENER BAR BASE FRAME RUBBER FOOT 2ND TRAY CONNECTOR COVER 2ND TRAY GEAR COVER FUSE (15A)(250V) FUSE (F1) (10A) (250V) FUSE (F3) (15A) (250V) FUSE (F3) (5A) (125V) POWER CORD (60HZ) POWER RECEPTACLE (REP 1.4) GDI HARNESS TIE WRAP (XD155DF) FERRITE CORE (XD155DF) DOCUMENT COVER CLOSED SENSOR ((29) (XD155DF)

7 8 9 10 11 12

152N1662

152N1660 152N1623 140N5115

13

140N5207

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

140N5117

22

108E3660 108E5330 117E9750

23 24 25 26 27 28

152N1652

130N911

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

PL 7.1A
manuals4you.com

PL 7.18 ELECTRlCAL COMPONENTS (PART 2 OF 2)


Item 1 Part 140N5473 Description
MAlN PWB (WIO [TAG 11) (XDlOO, XD102, XD104) (REP 1.I, ADJ 9.1 ADJ 9.2) ALTERNATE (WIO [TAG I ] ) (XD100, XD102, XD104) MAlN PWB (W/[TAG I ] ) (XD100, XD102, XD104) MAlN PWB (WI[TAG 11) (XD105F, XDIOSF) MAlN PWB (WIO [TAG 11) (XD12OF)(SERIAL# DR7000501-DR7061102) MAlN PWB (WIO [TAG 11) (XD120F)(SERIAL# DR7061103-DR7062812) MAlN PWB (WIO [TAG I ] ) (XD155DF) MAlN PWB (W/[TAG I ] ) (XD155DF) MAlN PWB (WIO [TAG I ] ) (XDI OSF)(SERIAL# FL7000501-FL7071476) (XD1OSF)(SERIAL# FL9000501-FL9052780) MAlN PWB (WIO [TAG 11) (XD105F)(SERIAL# FL7071477-FL7072844) (XDI 03F)(SERIAL# FL9052781-FL9053920) MAlN PWB (WI[TAG I ] ) (XDI20F) (WIO [TAG 11) (XD125F) MAlN PWB (XD130DF) MOUNTING BRACKET (NOT SPARED) BASE FRAME (NOT SPARED) PWB COVER (NOT SPARED)

Parts List

Reissue

Pb 7.1 8

Workcenter XD Series

Pb 7.2 DRUM CARTRIDGE CONTACT HOUSING


Part

Description DRUM CARTRIDGE CONTACT HOUSING CHARGECOROTRONHARNESS GRID BIASIMAIN PWB HARNESS SCREW (3x6) CONTACT SPRING CONTACT SPRING CONTACT SPRING SCREW (3x8)

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

4/00 5-31

Parts List

PI.. 7.2

manuals4you.com

PL 7.3 TRANSFEWDETAGK COROTRON ASSEMBLY


Item 1 2 3 4
Part

5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

600K15950

19N415

Description DETACK COROTRON GUIDE INSULATOR FRONT GUIDE SCREW (3x6) CONTACT COVER (R) TENSION SPRING TRANSFER COROTRON WIRE SPRING BRACKET TRANSFER COROTRON SPRING BC SPRING GROUNDING SPRING CONTACT COVER (F) COROTRON HOUSING PLATE GROUNDING PLATE TRANSFERIDETACK COROTRON ASSEMBLY (REP 9.2)

Parts List

Reissue

Pb 7 . 3

Workcenter XD Series

PL 7.4 HARNESS'S
ltern
1

Part

152N1632

Description CL LEAD HARNESS ICU-CCD HARNESS CENTER FRAME HARNESS (1OOV) OP HARNESS MAIN MOTOR HARNESS DVSHARNESS PPD2 INTERFACE HARNESS HL HARNESS (100V)

2 3
4

152N1630 152N1633

5 6 7 8

152N1623

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

PL 7 . 4
manuals4you.com

PL 8.1A PACKAGING AND ACCESSORIES


item
Part

Description
TOP PACKING CUSHION (L) TOP PACKING CUSHION (R) POWER CORD TIE WRAP BAG BAG HALF RATE CARRIAGE SHIPPING SCREW SHIPPING STRAP BOTTOM PACKING CUSHION BOX SHIPPING CUSHION THUMB SCREW LABEL DOCUMENT COVER CUSHION PRESSURE BLOCK LEVER ALTERNATE PRINTER CABLE

0000021B-SKW

Parts List

%>L 8.1A

4/00

Reissue

5-34

Workcenter XD Series

Ph 8.W PACKAGING AND ACCESSORIES (XB155BF ONLY)


item Part

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

117E9750

120E10520

Description TOP PACKING CUSHION (L) TOP PACKING CUSHION (R) POWER CORD (60HZ) TIE WRAP BAG BAG SHIPPING CUSHION SHIPPING CUSHION BOTTOM PACKING CUSHION
BOX SHIPPING CUSHION THUMB SCREW LABEL DOCUMENT COVER CUSHION SHIPPING STRAP HALF RATE CARRIAGE SHIPPING SCREW PRESSURE BLOCK LEVER PRINTER CABLE ALTERNATE PACKING CUSHION PACKING CUSHION

26E39240 7N696 117E19340 117E18690

17 18

19 20

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

PL 8.dB
manuals4you.com

PL 8.2 DRUM AND TONER CARTRIDGES


Item
1

Part
6R914 6R915 13R551 13R552

Description
TONER CARTRIDGE (USO) TONER CARTRIDGE (XCL) DRUM CARTRIDGE (USO) DRUM CARTRIDGE (XCL)

Parts L i s t

Reissue

Pb 8.2

Workcenter XD Series

PL 9.1A SBFIDSDF ASSEMBLY


item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Part

50N274

Description DOCUMENT TRAY FRONT GUIDE REAR GUIDE FEED RACK SCREW (3X8X) GEAR SPRING LOWER COVER DUPLEX TRAY (XD155DF) (DUPLEX) DSDF COVER (XD155DF) SDF FEED ASSEMBLY (REF: PL 9.2 Item 36) TIE WRAP SCREW (4x10) SCREW (4x12) (XD155DF) SCREW (4x10) SCREW (4x14) (XD155DF) SCREW (4x10) SCREW (3x10) (XD155DF) SCREW (3x6) (XD155DF) DSDF DEFLECTION GATE SOLENOID (SOL3)(DUPLEX) (XD155DF) (REP 5.29) LEVER (XD155DF) SPRING (XD155DF) STOPPER (XD155DF) MYLAR GUIDE SCREW (3x14) (XD155DF) MOTOR PAD (XD155DF) SCREW (3x8) (XD155DF) LEVER (XD155DF) BEARING (XD155DF) E RING (XD155DF) DSDF DEFLECTION GATE (XD155DF) MYLAR GUIDE BASE BASE (DUPLEX)(XD155DF) (XD103F, XD120F) CUSHION (XD155DF) SDF ASSEMBLY (XD103F, XDl 2OF) (XE) SDF ASSEMBLY (REP 5.1 5) SDF ASSEMBLY (XD155DFiXD130DF)

121N419

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

50N272 38N273 50N257 50N275 50N269

31 32

22N999 22N992 22N1031

Reissue
Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

PL 9.lA
manuals4you.com

PL 9.18 SDFIDSDF ASSEMBLY


Part
50N257 50N275 4N192

Description
BASE BASE (XD155DF) DOCUMENT COVER CUSHION SCREW (4x10) SCREW (4x14) (XD155DF) HINGE LEFT PAD PAD (XD155DF)(DUPLEX) E-RING (XD155DF) SDF EXlT ROLLER (DUPLEX)(REP 5.10) SPONGE (DUPLEX) SPONGE (XDl55DF) (DUPLEX) EXlT SHAFT EXlT SHAFT (XD155DF) (DUPLEX) SCREW (3x8) BEARING (XD155DF) E-RING (XD155DF) PRESSURE PLATE (XD155DF)(DUPLEX) SCREW (3x10) (XD155DF) WRAP SPRING (F) (XD155DF) WRAP SPRING (R) (XD155DF) SPRING SHAFT (XD155DF) SDF TRANSPORT ROLLER (REP 5.9) TRANSPORT SHAFT SPRING PAD (XD155DF)(DUPLEX) PAD (REF: PL 9.1 B ltem 5) HINGE RIGHT GROUND STRAP SCREW (3x14) (XD155DF) BASE PLATE GROUND SPRING (XD155DF) SCREW (3x8) GROUND SPRING (XD155DF) DSDF ASSEMBLY (BOTTOM) (PI0 PL 9.1A ltem 32)

Parts List

Reissue

PL 9.1 1E%

Workcenter XD Series

PL 9.2 SDF/DSDF FEED ASSEMBLY


ltem 1
Part 2N1563 21\11575 14N331

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Description FEED ASSEMBLY TOP COVER (USO/XCL) FEED ASSEMBLY TOP COVER
(XE) PAD PAPER GATE SPRING ARM PAPER GATE SCREW (3x8) SDF SENSOR PWB (REP 5.16) SDF SENSOR HARNESS SET DETECT ACTUATOR SENSOR ACTUATOR SDF FEED SOLENOID (SOL 1) (REP 5.17) SCREW (3x4) SCREW (3x6) (XD155DF) SOLENOID ARM SPRING SPRING(DUPLEX)(XD~~~DF) E RING CLUTCH GEAR (REP 5.18) (DUPLEX) CLUTCH SLEEVE (REP 5.18) CLUTCH SPRING (REP 5.18) CAM BOSS (REP 5.18) BUSHING CLUTCH SHAFT TENSION SPRING 2OMXE PULLEY E RING CLUTCH PAWL SPRING CLUTCH PAWL RETARD PAD(DUPLEX) (REP 5.19) GEAR (16T) SPRING PIN GEAR (20T) FEED ROLLER (REP 5.19) FEED SHAFT SPRING ARM LOWER COVER SDF FEED ASSEMBLY (REP 5.22)

31N161

140N5199 152N1656 120N284 120N285 121N410

31N160 9N1009 9N1037

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

7N738 16N176 9E57580 16E9640 6N892 9N1031 20N464

9N1036 7N739 22N977 7E29490

5E10560 6N891 9N1012 31N162 IN280

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

4/00
5-39

Parts List

PL 9.2

manuals4you.com

PL 9.3 SBF TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY


Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Part

Description DOCUMENT GUIDE SCREW (3x8) SCREW GEAR (27T)


DRIVE ARM SCREW (3x4) SDF DRIVE MOTOR (MOT 1 ) (REP 5.7) GROUND WIRE SDF HARNESS TIE WRAP SPRING DRIVE FRAME E RING WASHER DRIVE BELT (83MXE4.8) GEAR (48Tl15T) SPRING PIN (2-9) BEARING BEARING REAR FRAME RETARD PAD PRESSURE PLATE PRESSURE SPRING FEED ASSEMBLY LATCH PAD PULLEY TRANSPORT DRIVE BELT (REP 5.6) PAPER ADVANCE KNOB EXIT GUIDE SPRING SDF DOCUMENT TRANSPORT SDF DOCUMENT PATH SENSOR (Q3) (REP 5.8) ROLLER, EXIT DISCHARGE BRUSH DOCUMENT GUIDE REFLECTOR TRANSPORT ROLLER (DUPLEX) SDF FRONT COVER (XD103F, XD120F) (XE) SDF FRONT COVER SDF REAR COVER

127N988

9N1071

1 N281

15N298

38E13480

130N854 22N979

38N261 22N978 2N1573

38

Parls List

Reissue

PL 9 . 3

Workcenter XD Series

PL 9.4 SDF/DSDF TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY (XD155DF=/XD130DF)


item
1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 I4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Part 38E13480
15N298

22N1001

127N988

121N420

121N418

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45

130N854

22N1000

22N978

Description PAD RETARD PAD PRESSURE PLATE PRESSURE SPRING UPPER PAPER GUIDE DSDF EXIT ROLLER (DUPLEX)(REP 5.25) DISCHARGE BRUSH LOWER PAPER GUIDE SCREW (3x8) DOCUMENT GUIDE SDF HARNESS SCREW (3x6) SDF DRIVE MOTOR (MOT1) (REP 5.20) PAD DSDF EXIT ROLL SOLENOID (SOL2) (DUPLEX)(REP 5.24) TIE WRAP DRIVE FRAME SCREW (3x4) SCREW (3x5) E-RING WASHER DRIVE BELT GEAR (48T115T) SPRING PIN BEARING GEAR (30T) BEARING DSDF TRANSPORT ROLL CLUTCH (CLl)(DUPLEX) (REP 5.31) E RING BRACKET OPEN & SHUT LOCK SPRING SCREW (3x12) Y 22MXE PULLEY TRANSPORT DRIVE BELT PAPER RELEASE KNOB EXIT GUIDE SPRING SDF DOCUMENT PATH SENSOR (Q3) (REP 5.21) SDF DOCUMENT TRANSPORT DUPLEX GATE DUPLEX TRANSPORT ROLLER (DUPLEX)(REP 5.27) DOCUMENT GUIDE REFLECTOR TRANSPORT ROLLER (REP 5.26) SLEEVE TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY (REP 5.23) (PI0 PL 9.1A Item 32) Parts List

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

PL 9.4

manuals4you.com

Part Number index

Table 1 Part Number Index

Parts List

4/80

Reissue

Part Number index

5-42

Workcenter XD Series

Table 1 Part Number lndex Bart Number


31N167 38N230 38N254 38N261 38N273 38N274 38N275 38N278 38N279 38E13480

Table 1 Part Number lndex Part List


PL 6.2 PL 6.2 PL 9.1 B PL 9.3 PL 9.1A PL 1.1 PL 1 .1 PL 9.1 8 PL 9.1B PL 5.1

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

Parts List

Part Number lndex

manuals4you.com

fable 1 Part Nurnber lndex Part Number


90N140 90N144

Table 1 Pala Number lndex

Part List
PL 1.1 PL 1 .1 PL 6.1 PL 7.1 A PL 7.1A PL 5.3

1 103N206 108E3660
108E5330 11ON783

140N5412 140N5413 140N5415 140N5473 140N5474 140N5475 140N5500 140N5641 152N1622 152N1623

PL 7.1 B PL 7.1 B PL 7.1 B PL 7.1 8 PL 7.1B PL71B

PL71B
PL 1.3 PL 7.2 PL 2.1 PL 7.1A

Parts List

Reissue

Part Number lndex

Workcenter XD Series

Table 1 Part Number lndex

Reissue Workcenter XD Series

4/00 5-45

Parts List

Part Number Index

manuals4you.com

6 General Pracedures
Diagnostics
EnteringIExiting Diagnostics ................................................................................... Input Codes ................................................................................................................... Output Codes .............................. .................................................................................... Counter Data Codes ..................................................................................................... Counter Reset Codes .......................... ............................................................................ Displaying Status Subcode ............................................................................................. Status Code Clear ......................... . . .......................................................................... Initializing the CopierIPrinter ........................................................................................... Adjustment Codes ......................................................................................................... Configuration Codes ....................................................................................................... Total Copy Count Read....................... . . ..................................................................... Drum Cartridge Count Read ........................... . . .......................................................... Drum Cartridge Count Clear ........................................................................................... GP1 Image on Photoreceptor ...................... . . . . .........................................................

...

User Simulation Mode


Programmable Settings................

. . .............................................................................

Product Specifications
Physical Characteristics .................................................................................................. Installation Space Requirements .................................................................................... Electrical Requirements ..................... ...... ................................................................ CopierIPrinter Specifications ........................... . . .........................................................

Supplemental Tools and Supplies


Supplemental Tools and Supplies...................................................................................

Lot Number ldentification


Lot Number Identification ...................... . . .....................................................................

General Service Notes


General Service Notes ................................................................................................... Glossary of Terms ............................... .. ........................................................................ Notes: ..............................................................................................................................

General Procedures Workcentre XD SERIES

manuals4you.com

General Procedures

Workcentre XD SERIES

EnteringIExiting Diagnostics
1.
Switch on the power.

Input Codes
An lnput Code is entered to check the operation of a sensor or a switch. Enter the code for the component. Manually actuate the component while observing the appropriate lamp on the Control Console. Testing input components requires that the lamps on the Control Console function correctly.

NOTE: Step 2 must be performed within 4 seconds to enter diagnostics.


2

Press the Clear button, press the lmage Quality button, press the Clear button, and press the lmage Quality button. a. b. All lamps on the Control Console will go out. The copy count display will become blank.

3.
4. 5.

Using the Copy Quantity button(s), select the number that corresponds to the desired diagnostic test. Press Start. Using the Copy Quantity button(s), select the number that corresponds to the desired subcode. a. b. Pressing the Copy Quantity "ones" button increases the count by one. Pressing the Copy Count "tens" button increases the count by 10. Pressing and holding the %button while pressing the Copy Quantity "ones" button will decrease the count by one. Pressing and holding the % button while pressing the Copy Quantity "tens" button will decrease the count by 10.

Code 2-[02]

Input Component

Table 1 lnput Codes Control Console Lamp


Toner Cartridge LED Paper Jam LED Drum Cartridge LED SDF Jam LED Toner Cartridge LED Paper Jam LED Drum cartridge LED Image Quality Auto LED RIE LED

SDF Sensor Status Set Detect Sensor Document Path Sensor Document Cover Closed Sensor Position Sensor Paper Feed Sensor Q1 Fuser Jam Sensor Q2 Paper Exit Sensor Q3 Bypass Tray Paper Sensor New Drum Cartridge Sensor

30-[01] 30-[01] 30-[01] 30-[01] 30-[OI]

6.

Press the Start button.

NOTE: When exiting diagnostics, the number of times Clear needs to be pressed depends on the diagnostic code that is entered.
7. To exit diagnostics, either switch the power off, then on, or press the Clear button until the Ready LED illuminates and a copy quantity of 1 appears in the Copy Quantity display.

General Procedures Workcentre XD SERIES

EnteringIExiting Diagnostics, lnput Codes


manuals4you.com

Output Codes
Enter an Output Code to check the operation of an output component (clutch, motor, solenoid etc.) or to output the Grid Bias, Transfer Corotron, or Developer Bias voltage.

Table 1 Output Codes Code


25-[OI]

Output Component
Main Drive Motor and Developer Bias Voltage

Description
The main motor will operate for 30 seconds when the Start button is pressed. The Developer Bias Voltage, Charge Corotron voltage, and Grid Bias voltage will also be present for 30 seconds if the Toner Cartridge is installed. The polygon motor operates for 30 seconds when the Start button is pressed. HSYNC is performed and the Polygon Motor is run for 30 seconds when the Start button is pressed. Fault Code E7-03 Laser Problem will set when the control logic fails to detect HSYNC. The copierlprinter produces a solid grey test print when the Start button is pressed.

Table 1 Output Codes Code


1-[Ol]

Output Component
Scan Drive Motor MOT2

Description
25-[lo] 61-[03] Polygon Motor operation check Polygon Motor (HSYNC output) check

2-[03] 2-[04]

2-[05]

2-[06]

2-[07]

5-[OI] 5-[02]

5-[03] 6-[OI]

The optics will scan at a speed that corresponds to the selected magnification when the Start button is pressed. The Drum Cartridge LED will illuminate when the Scan Home sensor is in the home position. The SDF Motor operates for 10 seconds at a speed SDF Drive Motor MOT1 that corresponds to the current magnification. SDF Feed Solenoid SOLl The SDF Paper Feed Solenoid cycles 20 times between On (500 ms) and Off (500 ms) when the Start Button is pressed. DSDF Pinch Roll Solenoid The DSDF Exit Pinch Roll Solenoid SOL2 cycles 20 times between On (500 ms) and Off (500 ms) when SOL2 the Start Button is pressed. DSDF Exit Roll Clutch C L l The DSDF Exit Roll Clutch CL1 cycles 20 times between engaged (500 ms) and disengaged (500 ms) when the Start button is pressed. The DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid SOL3 cycles DSDF Deflection Gate 20 times between On (500 ms) and Off (500 ms) Solenoid SOL3 when the Start Button is pressed. The LEDs on the Control Console will illuminate for Control Console LED five seconds when the Start button is pressed. check The heat rod will pulse on five times each time the Heat Rod HTRl and Start button is pressed. The Exhaust Fan will rotate Exhaust Fan MOT3 in the high speed mode. The exposure lamp will illuminate for five seconds Exposure Lamp each time the Start button is pressed. The paper feed solenoid for the selected paper tray Paper Feed Solenoid will cycle on and off 20 times when the Start button SOLl (Tray I ) , Paper Feed Solenoid SOL2 (Tray is pressed. 2), Alternate Tray Feed Solenoid Registration Roller Sole- The registration roller solenoid will cycle on and off 20 times when the Start button is pressed. noid check Transfer Corotron Voltage When the Start button is pressed, the Transfer Corotron output is present for 30 seconds. This measurement is made at the Transfer Corotron Plate with the Side Door open and the Side Door Interlock Switch (S3lS4) actuated.

64-[Ol]

Internal Test Pattern

6-[02] 8-[06]

10

Toner Motor MOT4

Voltage: +I200 VDC (not under load) The toner motor will operate for 30 seconds when the Start button is pressed.

General Procedures

Output Codes

Counter Data Codes


Table 1 Counter Data Codes Code
22-[05]

Counter Reset Codes


A code is entered to reset or disable drum count data.

1 Copier Counter Data


I

Table 1 Counter Reset Codes Code


24-[07]

/Total Copies The copy count will flash 3 digits at a time, 2 times (6 digits) 000 3 234 (Example shows a copy count of 234.) The display will pause about 2 seconds between counts.

Copier Counter Data Drum Cartridge Count Clear When Start is pressed, the drum copy count will reset to 000-000. Scanner Counter Clear When Start is pressed, the scanner counter value is reset to 000-000.

22-[I 21

Drum Cartridge Count Check

he

drum cartridge count will flash 3 digits at a time. 2 times (6 digits).

22-[I 41 22-[21]

000 -t 234 (Example shows a drum cartridge count of 234.) The PROM version is displayed as 3 digits when the Start button is pressed. Scanner Counter Check The scanner counter value will flash 3 digits at a time, 2 times (6 digits).

/ 000 -t 234 (Example shows a scanner count of 234.)

General Procedures Workcentre XD SERIES

Counter Data Codes, Counter Reset Codes


manuals4you.com

Displaying Status Subcode


If a status code which is displayed is associated with more than one subcodes, press the Start button to vlew the subcode.

Status Code Clear


A code is entered to clear a U 2 or other status code.

Table 1 Status Code Clear Codes Code Status Code

/ 14
16

I Status Code Clear - Codes other than U2


When Start
IS

pressed, Status codes other than U2 will be cleared

U2 Status Code Clear


When Start 1 s pressed, a U 2 Status code w ~ lbe l cleared

General Procedures

Displaying Status Subcode, Status Code Clear

Workcentre XD SERIES

initializing the CopierlPrinler


CWkBTtlON Changes lo the factory default sell~ngswbtch exist pnor lo iniiiaiization will be lost twhen the copieriprinler ~nitiaiizes Check and record aii Configuration Codes Adjustment Codes and Prograwmahie Selbngs Features before inifiairzing the c~pier/~oiinier
NOTE: When diagnosis indicates that the Main PWB may require replacement, initialize the copier/printer before changing the Main PWB. Operate the copier/printer after completing the initialization process to determine if the problem still exists.

1.

2.
3.

mode and check all Conf~gurat~on Codes, Adjustment Codes and Enter the d~agnost~c Programmable Settlngs Features. Record all settlngs whlch are drfferent than the factory default settrngs. Ex~t the d~agnost~cs mode. Initialize the copierlprinter. a. Ensure that the Preset Reduclion/Enlargement LED is set to the 100% setting. b. Perform the following within four seconds: press the Clear button press the I mage Quality button press the Clear button again press the Preset ReductionlEnlargement button The display will go blank. Enter the Initialization Code 88-[I] and press the Start button.

c.
4. 5.

The copieriprinter will initialize and resume operation in the Ready mode. Enter the diagnostic mode and re-enter all of the Adjustment Codes and Configuration Codes which were programmed prior to initialization. Re-enter the Programmable Features Settings which were present prior to initialization and then press the Clear button to resume normal machine operation.

General Procedures Workcentre XD SERIES

initializing the Copierllarinter


manuals4you.com

Adjustment Codes
A code is entered to perform an adjustment.

Table 1 Adjustment Codes Code

1 unction
(High mode)

1 Range

Default

ADJ
ADJ 9.2

Description
NOTE: Check that the Grid Bias Voltage (Low mode) 8 [ 3 ] is within range before checking and/or adjusting the Grid Bias Voltage (High mode). When the Start button is pressed, the Charge Corotron output is present in the High Mode for 30 seconds. When the Start button is pressed, the Charge Corotron output is present in the Low Mode for 30 seconds. The main motor will operate for 30 seconds when the Start button is pressed. The Developer Bias Voltage, Charge Corotron voltage, and Grid Bias voltage will also be present for 30 seconds if the Toner Cartridge is installed. If the Toner Cartridge is removed before this code is entered, only the Main Motor is energized. When the Start button is pressed, the code number for the side edge erase amount is displayed.

-400 to -450 VDC -380 +I- 20 VDC and Developer Bias Voltage

ADJ 9.2 ADJ 9.1

26-[43]

1 Side Edge Erase

10 to 5.0 mm

2.0 mm

Code Erase Amount (mm) 0=0 mm 1=0.5 mm 2=1.0 mm 3=1.5 mm 4=2.0 mm (default) 5=2.5 mm 6=3.0 mm 7=3.5 mm 8=4.0 mm 9=4.5 mm 10=5.0 mm
To change the side edge erase amount, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button. When the Start button is pressed, the code number for the fuser temperature is displayed.

190C

Code Temperature (Degrees C) 0=175 1=I80 2=185 3=190 default (all models except XD130df and XD155df) 4=195 default (XD130df and XD155df) 5=200
To change the fuser temperature, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button to select the code for the desired temperature and then press the Start button.

General Procedures

Adjustment Codes

Workcentre XD SERIES

Table 1 Adiustment Codes Range


155 to180%

Default
165C

ADJ

Description
When the Start button is pressed, the code number for the multi-copy fusing temperature is displayed.

NOTE: To reduce heat build up in the machine during jobs of 20 copies or more, the fusing temperature is lowered to the selected value in the list below when the twentieth copy is reached.

Code Temperature (Degrees C) 0=155 1=160 2=165 default (all models except XDI 30df and XD155df) 3=170 default (XDI 30df and XD155df) 4=175 5=180
To change the multi-copy fusing temperature, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button to select the code for the desired temperature and then press the Start button. When the Start button is pressed, the code number for the current duplex copying fusing temperature shift is displayed.

NOTE: The temperature shift which is selected is added to the currently selected Fuser Temperature (refer to Adjustment Code 43-[I]).

Code Temperature (Degrees C) o=+/-0 1=-8 2=-6 3=-4 4=-2 5=+/-0 6=+2 7=+4 8=+6 9=+8
To change the duplex copying fusing temperature, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button to select the code for the desired temperature shift and then press the Start button.

General Procedures WorkCentre XD SERIES

Adjustment Codes

manuals4you.com

Table 1 Adjustment Codes lange


Ixposure Adjustnent

1 Default

LDJ

Description
When the Start button is pressed, the exposure setting for Auto mode is displayed. To view the settings for the other modes, press the lmage Quality button until the appropriate LED or LED illuminate.

\DJ 6 . l

lmage Quality Mode I Illuminated LED Auto Auto mode LED Text Text mode LED Photo Photo mode LED Toner Save Toner Save LED
To change an exposure setting value, press the Copy Quantity buttons until the desired settin!: appears in the Copy Quantity display. Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting or settings. mage Magnificaion (Front to Rear) Zdjustment: Zutomatic mage Magnificaion (Front to Rear) Zdjustment: vlanual

iDJ 6.8

Press the Image Quality button until only the Auto lamp is lit, then press the Start button. The machine scans the reference line on the calibration strip, calculates the correct magnificatic and automatically adjusts the setting. The adjusted setting appears in the Quantity display. Press the Clear button to exit the mode.

iDJ 6.8

Press the Image Quality button until only the Text lamp is lit. The current setting is displayed i the Quantity display. To change magnification, press the Copy Quantity buttons. lncreasing the number increases tl magnification. Decreasing the number decreases the magnification. Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.

mage Magnificaion (Lead Edge to rrail Edge)

iDJ 6.8

Press the Image Quality button until only the Photo lamp is lit. The scan speed is adjusted. To change magnification, press the Copy Quantity buttons. lncreasing the number increases tl magnification. Decreasing the number decreases the magnification.

I Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting
-ead Edge 3eletion

\DJ 8.2

Press the image Quality button until only the Text lamp is lit. The Lead Edge Deletion setting is displayed. To change Lead Edge Deletion, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm. To decrease the lead edge deletion, decrease the number. To increase the lead edge deletion, increase the number.

I Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.

General Procedures

Adjustment Gsdes

Code Function

Table 1 Adiustment Codes Default ADJ


ADJ 8.3

Range

Description
Press the Image Quality button until the Auto, Text, and Photo lamps are lit. The Trail Edge Deletion setting is displayed. To change Trail Edge Deletion, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm. To decrease the trail edge deletion, decrease the number. To increase the trail edge deletion, increase the number. Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting. Press the lmage Quality button until only the Photo lamp is lit. The Lead Edge Registration (Scan Start Timing) setting is displayed. To change the timing of the Scan ON signal, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm. To decrease the distance between the image and the lead edge of the paper, enter a higher number. This action causes the scan to start sooner. To increase the distance between the image and the lead edge of the paper, enter a smaller number. This action delays the scan. Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.

50-[Ol]

Trail Edge Deletion 00 to 99

50

50-[Ol]

Lead Edge Registration (Scan Start Timing)

This setting affects the Scan ON signal timing.

50-[Ol]

Lead Edge Registration This setting affects the Registration Roller ON timing.

00 to 99

50

ADJ 8.4

Press the Image Quality button until only the Auto lamp is lit. The Lead Edge Registration setting is displayed. To change the Lead Edge Registration, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm. To decrease the distance between the image and the lead edge of the paper, enter a higher number. To increase the distance between the lead edge and the image, enter a lower number. Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting. NOTE: Power the copier/printer off and then on before making the SDF/DSDF Lead Edge Registration adjustment. Make the adjustment immediately after turning on the power. Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Text lamps are lit. The SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration setting is displayed. (To change the setting, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shin of 0.1

ADJ 8.5
Edge Registration (Scan Start Tim-

This setting affects the Scan ON signal timing when copies are made from the SDFI

DSDF.

To move the image toward the lead edge of the paper, enter a lower number. To move the image away from the lead edge of the paper, enter a higher number. Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.

General Procedures Workcentre XD SERIES

Adjustment Codes
manuals4you.com

Table I Adjustment Codes Code


50-[I 01

Function
Center Offset Adjustment: Paper Tray1 and Paper Tray 2

Range
00 to 99

Default
50

ADJ

Description Paper Tray 1 : Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Paper Tray 1 lamps are lit. Paper Tray 2: Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Paper Tray 2 lamps are lit.

1
00 to 99

The Center Offset setting is displayed. To change the Center Offset setting, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm. To shift the image toward the front of the machine, increase the number. To shift the image toward the rear of the machine, decrease the number. Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.

50-[I 01

Center Offset Adjustment: Paper Tray Bypass (XDlOO/XD102/ XD103flXD120fl

Press the lmage Quality button until only the Auto lamp is lit. The Center Offset setting is displayed.

I
00 to 99

I I I

To change the Center Offset setting, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm. To shift the image toward the front of the machine, increase the number. To shift the image toward the rear of the machine, decrease the number. Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.

50-[lo]

Center Offset Adjustment: Print Position Alternate Paper Tray (XD104/XD105f/ XDl30df/XD155df)

Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Alternate Tray lamps are lit. The Center Offset setting is displayed.

I
00 to 99 50

To change the Center Offset setting, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm. To shift the image toward the front of the machine, increase the number. To shift the image toward the rear of the machine, decrease the number. Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.

50-[I 01

Center Offset Adjustment: Scan from SDFJDSDF (XDl 03f/XD105f/ XD120f/XD125f/ XD130df/XD155df)

Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto, Text and Photo lamps are lit. The Center Offset setting is displayed. To change the Center Offset setting, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm.

I1

To shift the image toward the front of the machine, decrease the number. To shift the image toward the rear of the machine, increase the number.

/Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.

General Procedures

Adjustment Codes

Workcentre XD SERIES

Table 1 Adjustment Codes Zange


)O to 99

IDJ

Description Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Text lamps are lit. The Center Offset setting is displayed. To change the Center Offset setting, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm. To shift the image toward the front of the machine, decrease the number. To shift the image toward the rear of the machine, increase the number. Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting

Adjustment: Scan Scan from Document Glass

il -[02]

Registration Buckle: Paper Tray 1 and1 or Paper Tray 2

Paper Tray 1 : Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Paper Tray 1 lamps are lit. Paper Tray 2: Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Paper Tray 2 lamps are lit. The setting for the selected Paper Tray is displayed in the Copy Quantity display and the LED for the selected magnification is lit. To change the setting, select the desired magnification, then press the Copy Quantity buttons. To increase the buckle, increase the number. To decrease the buckle, decrease the number.

I Press the
Buckle: Paper Tray Bypass

Clear button to exit and store the new seiting(s). Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto lamp flashes. The Paper Tray setting is displayed in the Copy Quantity display and the LED for the selected magnification is lit.

To change the setting, select the desired magnification, then press the Copy Quantity buttons. To increase the buckle, increase the number. To decrease the buckle, decrease the number. Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting(s). Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Alternate Paper Tray lamps are lit. The Alternate Paper Tray setting is displayed in the Copy Quantity display and the LED for the selected magnification is lit. To change the setting, select the desired magnification, then press the Copy Quantity buttons. To increase the buckle, increase the number. To decrease the buckle, decrease the number. Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting(s).

51-[02]

Registration Buckle: Alternate Paper Tray (XD104/XD105fl XD130dflXDI 55df)

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES
6-13

General Procedures

Adjustment Codes

manuals4you.com

Table 1 Adjustment Codes

1 Function
SDFIDSDF Exposure Correction (XDI 03f/XD105f/ XDl 2OflXD125fl

/Range 00 to 99

/Default 50

ADJ

Description The current setting for SDF Exposure is displayed when this diagnostic code is entered. If the copy output is acceptable when copies are run from the Document Glass but is consistently either too light or too dark when run from the SDF, make the appropriate adjustment below: Increase the setting to obtain darker copy output. Decrease the number to obtain lighter copy output To change the setting, press the copy quantity buttons until the new value is displayed, then press the Start button. The new value is stored and a copy is made. If necessary, repeat the process until the output has the desired density.

I Press the

Clear button to store the setting and exit the Diagnostic mode.

General Procedures

Adjustment Codes

Workcentre XD SERIES

Configuration Codes
CAUTION The correct selbngs for the machine being serviced can be deferm~ned from the informahon tn ihe Descnpt~on column ~nTable 1
These codes allow the d~splay~ng or chang~ng of varlous mach~ne conf~gurat~ons

Table I Configuration Codes Code


22-[I 41 26-[OI]

Function
P-ROM version

Range

Default

ADJ

Description
When the Start button is pressed after entering 22-[14], the P-ROM version displays as three digits on the Copy Quantity display. When the Start button is pressed after entering 26-[Ol], the current tray configuration (0 or 1) is displayed: 0 = Single sheet bypass 1 = Alternate Tray To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button. When the Start button is pressed after entering 26-[02], the current SDF configuration (0, 1 or 2) is displayed: 0 = Without SDF 1 =With SDF 2 = Not available To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button. When the Start button is pressed after entering 26-[03], the current Paper Tray 2 configuration (0 or 1) is displayed: 0 = Without Paper tray 2 1 = With Paper tray 2 To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button. When the Start button is pressed after entering 26-[04], the current duplex code number (0 or 1) is displayed: 0 =Without Duplex 1 = With Duplex To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.

Tray Configuration 0 or 1

26-[02]

SDF Setting

O o r l or2

26-[03]

Paper Tray 2 setting

0 or 1

26-[04]

Duplex setting

0 or 1

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES
6-15

General Procedures

Configuration Codes

manuals4you.com

Table 1 Configuration Codes Function


Paper size config ration ADJ

1 Description
When the Start button is pressed after entering 26-[06], the current paper size configuration (0, 1 or 2) is displayed: 0 = Inch series 1 = AB series 2 = Japan AB Series To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button. When the Start button is pressed, the machine copy rate is displayed. This setting cannot be changed from the Control Panel. To determine the copy rate for the machine, refer to the section CopierIPrinter Specifications, Table 1 . When 26-[20] is entered, the currently active code number (0 or I ) is displayed: 0 = Trail edge deletion is allowed 1 = Trail edge deletion is not allowed To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.

Copy rate

0, 12, 15 cprr

Trail edge deletio

CE mark application

When 26-[30] is entered, the currently active code number (0 or 1) is displayed: 0 = CE mark application control off 1 = CE mark application control on To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.

Drum cartridge lii end

When 26-[38] is entered, the currently active code number (0 or 1) is displayed: 0 = End of life disabled 1 = End of life enabled To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.

Memory capacity (Main PWB)

When 26-[39] is entered, the currently active code number (0, 1 or 2) is displayed:

NOTE: Some early production XDlPOf machines were built with 6 MBytes of memory, not
the 4 MBytes that is standard for the XD120f. On these early machines, the Memory Capacity configuration code will appear as "2,"and the machine will operate normally. If the GDI Memory Board on an XD120f is replaced, reset this configuration code to "I." 0 = No memory 1 = 4 Mbyte (all WorkCentre XD Series models except XD155df and XD130df) 2 = 6 Mbyte (XD130df and XD155df) See Note below. To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.

General Procedures

Configuration Codes

WorkCentre XD SERIES

Table 1 Configuration Codes Code


26-[40]

Function

Range

Default

LDJ

Description
When 26-[40] is entered, the currently active code number (0, 1, 2 or 3) is displayed: O=Oseconds 1 = 30 seconds 2 = 60 seconds 3=90seconds To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.

Polygon motor off 10, 1, 2, 3

Workcentre XD SERIES

4/00 6-17

General Procedures

Configuration Codes

manuals4you.com

Total Copy Count Read


1. 2.
Enter diagnostics. Record the total copy count. a. Enter code 22-[05]. b. The copy count will flash 3 digits at a time, 2 times (6 digits), then repeat the sequence indefinitely. The most significant digits will flash first. c. For example, 000 + 234 (example shows a Copy count of 234.) The display will pause about 1 second between counts.

Drum Cartridge Count Read


1.

2.

Enter dlagnostlcs Record the drum cartr~dge copy count a Enter code 22-[12] then repeat the The drum count w~llflash 3 d~gltsat a t~me,1 t~mes(6 d~g~ts), b The most s~gn~flcant d ~ g ~will t s flash flrst sequence ~ndefln~tely c For example, 000 + 234 (example shows a drum count of 234 ) The dlsplay w ~ lpause l about 1 second between counts

3.

To end the copy count read, press the Clear button.

3.

To end the drum count read, press the Clear button

General Procedures

4/00
6-18

Total Copy Count Read, Drum Cartridge Count Read

Workcentre XD SERIES

Drum Cartridge Count Clear


1 2.

GP1 Image on Photoreceptor


1.
2.

Enter diagnost~cs. Enter code 24-[07]. Press the Start button. The drum cartridge count will reset to 0. Exit diagnostics.

3. 4.
5.

Open the document cover and prepare the copier to make a copy of Side 3 of the Standard Test Pattern (82P524). Leaving the document cover open, press the Start button. (The carriage will begin to scan.) Open the copier or turn off the power when the carriage reaches the center. This will cause a paper jam. Clear the paper jam, being careful not to disturb the image on the photoreceptor. Observe the image on the photoreceptor. Repeat steps 1 through 4 two more times, or as required.

3.

4.
5.

- - -

General Procedures Workcentre XD SERIES

Drum Cartridge Count Clear, GP1


manuals4you.com

Programmable Settings
Features 0-9 & 11-19
To change a programmable setting, refer to Table I. NOTE: Programmable features can only be accessed while the copier is in the Ready mode. 1.
2.

Table 1 Proarammable Features Settinas Program Number Program


1 Auto Clear Time Out

Option Number and Option


0 - Off 1 - 30 seconds 2 - 60 seconds (default) 3 - 90 seconds 4 - 120 seconds 0 -Off 1 - 45 seconds 2 - 90 seconds (default) 3 - 2 minutes 4 - 5 minutes 0 - 2 minutes 1 - 5 minutes (default) 2 - 15 minutes 3 - 30 minutes 4 - 60 minutes 5 - 120 minutes 6 - Off 0 - 100% (default) 1 - 99% 2 - 101% 0 - Auto Exposure (default) 1 - Text 2 - Photo 1 0 - Lightest 1 - Lighter 2 - Normal (default) 3 - Darker 4 - Darkest 0 - On (default) 1 - Off 0 - On (default) 1 - Off 0 - On (default) 1 - Off 0 -On 1 - Off (default) 50 - 200% 50% (default) 0 - On 1 - Off (default)

Press the lmage Quality button until the Toner Save LED illuminates. Press the lmage Quality button again and hold it for 4 to 6 seconds. The Auto LED illuminates and the three red LEDs (Jam, Toner Cartridge indicator, Photoreceptor) flash. Press the Copy Quantity "10's" button to select the program number of the feature to be changed. NOTE: You will not be given the choice to change an option if the copier is not equipped with the feature. 3 Time-out to Power Shut-Off 2 Time-out to Power Save

3.

4. 5. 6.
7.

Press the Start button. The current setting for the program will flash. Press the l's-unit button until the desired option number is displayed. Press the Start button to store the selection. Press the Clear button to continue making other changes, or press the lmage Quality button to return to Ready mode.

Default Magnification

Feature 10
To change the programmable feature, refer to Table 1. NOTE: Programmable features can only be accessed while the copier is in the Ready mode.
1. 2.

Default Exposure

Auto Contrast Adjustment

Press the lmage Quality button until the Toner Save LED illuminates. Press the lmage Quality button again and hold it for 4 to 6 seconds. The Auto LED illuminates and the three red LEDs (Toner Cartridge, Drum Cartridge, Paper Jam) flash. Press the "10's" button until the number 10 is displayed. NOTE: You will not be given the choice to change an option if the copier is not equipped with the feature.

3.

Paper Trail Edge Deletion (4 mm) Paper Tray Bypass Auto Start (Models XD 100/102/103f/120f/ 125f) SDF Auto Start (Models XD103f/105f/120f/ 1255) DSDF Auto Start (Models XD130dffiD155df) RIE Preset Auto Paper Tray Switching (Models XD104/105f/120f/ 130df/155df only)

4. 5. 6.
7.

Press the Start button. The current reductionlenlargement setting will flash. Press the Zoom-Up or Zoom-Down button until the desired percentage is displayed. Press the Start button to store the selection. Press the Clear button to make more changes or press the lmage Quality button to return to Ready mode.

9 10 11

Table 1 Programmable Features Settings Program Number Program


0 Priority Tray (Models XD104/105f/130df/ 155df only)

Option Number and Option


0 - Main paper tray 1 - Alternate paper tray

General Procedures

Programmable Settings

Table 1 Programmable Features Settings Program Number Program 12 SDFIDSDF Contrast Adjustment (Models XD103f/105f/120f/125f/ 13Odf/155df) Option Number and Option 0 - l~ghtest 1 - I~ghter 2 - Normal (default) 3 - darker 4 - darkest 0 - 60 seconds (default) 1 - 90 seconds 2 - 120 seconds 3 - 150 seconds 4 - 180 seconds 5 - Off - no t~me out

14

16 17

Percent (0-100) Drum Cartr~dge L~fe Rema~n~ng 0 - 1 to 1 default Default I-s1ded/2-~1ded Mode 1 - 1 to 2 (Model XD130dfLXD155df) 2-2to2 3-2t01 Default copy paper size for 2-sided copying from the document glass: 18 Top Paper Tray Default (Models XD120f/XD13Odf/ XD 155df) 0-85x14 1 - 8 5 x 13 2-8.5~ 124 3 - A41 210 x 297mm 4 - 8.5 x 11 (default) 5 - 951 182x 257mm 6-5.5~85 7 - A51 148 x 210mm 8 - 941 257 x 364mm 0-85x14 1 - 8 5 x 13 2 -8.5 x 12 4 3 - A41 210 x 297mm 4 - 8.5 x 11 (default) 5 - 851 182x 257mm 6 - 5.5 x 8.5 7 - A51 148x210mm 8 - 941 257 x 364mm

19

Lower Paper Tray Default (Models XDIZOf/XD13Odf/ XD 155df)

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES 6-21

General Procedures

Programmable Settings

manuals4you.com

Physical Characteristics
Table 1 Machine Dimensions Machine Dimensions
XD100/ XD102 XD104 XD103f/XD105f/XD125f

Installation Space Requirements

Width x Depth x Height


20.5 x 17.5 x 12 inches (518 x 445 x 304 mm) 30 Ox 1 7 5 x 12 inches (762 ~ 4 4 5 x 3 0 4 mm) 30 0 x 19.3 x 14.9 inches (762 x 491 x 379 mm)

XDl20f/XDl3Odf/XDl55df 30 0 x 19 3 x 18 3 inches (762 x 491 x 464 mm)

Table 2 Machine Weight Machine Weight


XDlOO/XD102/XD104 XD103f/XD105f/XDI 25f

(includes Drum Cartridge and Toner Cartridge)


409Ibs(18.6kg) 48.5 Ibs (22 kg)

Figure 1 Physical Dimensions (XD100/XD102)

I XDI 3 0 d f / ~ ~ 1 5 5 d f

169.5 Ibs. (31.6 kg)

Figure 2 Physical Dimensions (XD104)

General Procedures

4/00

Physical Characteristics, lnslallation Space Require-

6-22

Workcentre XD SERIES

Figure 3 Physical Dimensions (XDlOSfED105fEDI25f)

Figure 5 Minimum Clearances (All models)

30.0"1762 mm

Figure 4 Physical Dimensions (XD120fED13ODFED155df)

General Procedures Workcentre XD SERIES

installation Space Requirements

manuals4you.com

Electrical Requirements
Electrical Requirements Power Consumpt~on
Table 1 Electrical Requirements 120 VAC +I- lo%, 50160 Hz, 15A MAX 1 0 kW Standby 14 3 Watts Shut-off 5 Watts

GopieriPrinter Specificalions
Table 1 Specifications
Onglnal Slze SDFIDSDF Capaclty Copy Ratlo Percentages Copy Paper Size and Weight Document Glass 10" x 14" maximum (54) SDF 1 DSDF 1 0 x 1 4 (B4) maxrmum 30 pages, 20 lbl80 gsm 16 Ib - 24 Ib (60 -90 gsm) 1.1 +I- 1% Preset: 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200, one customer settable Zoom: 50 - 200% I (Tray 1 and Tray 2: 5.5x8.5 1A5 to 8.5~14" / 216x356mm 16-24 Ib / 60-90 gsrn Bypass Tray /Alternate Tray: 3.5x5.5" l89x140mm to 8.5~14" I 216x356mm 14-34 Ib 1 52-130 gsrn 10 cpm at 600 dpi, 8-112" x 1I " (A4) and smaller, same size originals (XD100/XD1021XD103f/XD104/XD105f) 12 cpm at 600 dpi, 8-112 x 11" (A4) and smaller, same size originals (XDI20f I XD125f) 13 cpm at 600 dpi, 8-112" x 11" (A4) and smaller, same size originals (XD130df) 15 cpm at 600 dpi, 8-112 x 11 I A4 and smaller, same size originals (XD155df) Print Rate Paper Tray Capacity: XDlOO/XD103f/XD104 XD105f 8 ppm at 600 dpi with ECP parallel port communications enabled 250 sheets - 20 Ibl80 gsrn

Copy Rate

1200 sheets - 24 lb190 gsrn


IXD1O2

XD120flXD130dfl XD155df

Tray 1 - 250 sheets, 20 lbl80 gsm; Tray 2 - 250 sheets, 20 lb180 gsm

Paper Tray Bypass: XD100/XD102/XD103fl 1 XD120flXD125f Alternate Paper Tray: XD104lXD105fl XD130dflXD155df First copy output time Warm up time 50

9 seconds (warm) 23 seconds (cold) less than 23 seconds

General Procedures

CopieriPrinter Specifications

4/00 6-24

Workcentre XD SERIES

Table I Specifications
Restrictions: Paper Stock Feed recycled paper, labels, or transparencies one sheet at a time. Use labels and transparencies which are specifically designed for copiers (high temperatures).

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES
6-25

General Procedures

CopierIPrinter Specifications

manuals4you.com

Supplemental Tools and Supplies


Table 1 Tools

NASGIXCL - 43P45

Heavy-Duty Towels Lens and Mirror Cleaner Lint-Free Cloth Oil Service Log Pouch Test Pattern

NASGIXCL - 35P3191 NASGIXCL - 43P81 or 43H12 XE - 8R901784 NASGIXCUXE - 60084372 NASGIXCL - 70P23 XE - 70P95 600K53510 82P524 (NASG and XCL) 82P523 (XE) 82P12130 (NASG)

Table 2 Supplies Supply Name


Toner Cartridge Drum Cartridge 6R914 (NASG) 6R915 (XE) 13R551 (NASG) 13R552 (XE)

Part Number

General Procedures

Supplemental Tools and Supplies

Workcentre XD SERIES

Lot Number Identification


Drum Cartridge
Factory

Toner Cartridge

00000000
V
Last digit of product~on year Serial number Production month Last digit of production year

Destination

Serial number

Production month (1,2,3 ,... O,X,Y)

Figure 1 Drum Cartridge Lot Number Identification

Figure 3 Toner Cartridge Lot Number Identification

Figure 2 Drum Cartridge Lot Number Label Location Figure 4 Toner Cartridge Lot Number Label Location

General Procedures Workcentre XD SERIES

Lot Number Identification

manuals4you.com

General Service Notes


Workcentre XD Series Toner Cartridge Yield
A small number of customers may complain that they are not getting 6000 copies from their toner cartridge.
The expected Toner Cartridge yield of 6000 copies is based on an average area coverage of six (6) percent per 8.5" X 11" (A4) copy. However, yield varies with area coverage of customer documents, document size, contrast setting, and percent of copies made with the document cover open. Therefore, the 6000 copies yield cannot be guaranteed. It is important to understand that many of the customer's documents are greater than 6% area coverage. Any document which contains more area coverage than the samples represented in Figure I and Figure 2, will result in a yield of less than 6000 copies. Figure 3 and Figure 4 show examples of area coverage that exceeds 6 %.
S c c l l o n 5-24
repoifa me .'i.r.s " C ilila,~* r h n i i jieprrn car M . o n y o i far sulmiss>on 1" t l n r snt,iit, i . t h e .ouna>1 r o m p l r l e r1nanE l a l r e p a r t = lor each giait.7, for e n a h fiscal year. and for panod. --). be iEq"lred b y the m a y o r T-r innvnl ilnancIa. =hn.l br prl,tld f o r dlslrlbutlan am moan pOrribis r h F .lose O f eaon : . r o a 1 ? a n a d
Quarterly and i n n i l a l iinanoiai

. . . , , ':

'"

S e c t l o n 5-26

Various funds

1.

l o colsade ~ e r c i s y r u n r g r a y l l n e i d e v e l o p nearly 3 % compirteiy


/I"*,

$sack

2.

m i l i n d i c a t e s me h g h conrrair whmsh may be obtained ~ , t h r h , ~ zype


Of

deuelopmml.

3.

However, the d e V v r t i o n

of aowder

in

any area i s .ooionlnaieiy

iieaal to the e l e c r i o r r v r c c o n t r a s t b e t e e n t h a t area and , r i oackgirund

4.

A black

IlnP

on a g r a y b a c k q i o v n d w I 1 reproduce as a denre l i n e on a

c l e a r u r i * g i o u n J b r i i v - r ormli i i u i c n i a l d i i s r e n r r r a r e developed.

Figure 2 Five percent coverage

5-

Svmmar~zng, w

may r a y t h a t s a r s a d e - r ' c r e i i l ~ ~ + m xerography has rha

Pal i o w l n g characterliilcs.

5.

a.

N a r r h l l n e r are o e v e i o ~ e dro a denrlry ap~roxsmafely ~ i o ~ o r : ~ o ~ ~ l


SO

the c o n t r a s t between the line and ( t i background density.

7.

i.

Wide areas a r e developed a t the edges Lo aboui r h e r a m degiea,


2 n d a r e e r l e n t i a i l y vnderdeveloped i n t e r n a l l y .

3.

X e r D c o p i e i made w i t h a d e v e l o p e r having a h g h i r s b v e l e c i r i c diiieieiice

have l e s s baskground and sharper, mare w l l d e f i n e d rhsracrerr o f m r e what 1-r d e n i t y rhan t h o r e made w t h a d e v e l o p e r having a ton rrlbo-

e l e c t r l s difference.

I.

I f , however, the tr#boelecfr#cd f f e r e n c e ir too greaz, very i i t t i e p h d e r d e p o s t l o n w i l l occur i n the Image a r e a s and

washed-our p r i n t

will resuit.
(Text from xinoiRAPnr

iooau, ,955 " ? h o ~ e ~ r a ~ h i ~ rn ~ ~ ~ ~ r r , ~ ~ , , )

Figure 1 Three percent coverage

General Procedures

General Service Notes

Workcentre XD SERIES

Figure 3 Eleven percent coverage

Wins Art Award


BY ALEX
ThS blS*,"" P>Qh,".".,#".*O

A? L1_". ..,,"L?,aq,.",.

--

an a-am I" SL"nr"8' Dl*"* M "iv-i.,"r a' ax? Brlarr,, Wad Bealder m e nono, ,*nr ,* b" %rn"l<,. l ( . a

'"

e., C"""l; I/sm-P

--nn

* . . r

-.-

, " & *

Ciied as rcaran tor the a,"ard


w U Dlu*.= rnCE", r"w i h t W-u-."

* Uri' ,"cil.P*I*n"an*.'n
+"?c,moae~

an* wmn

-oiin

Ir,.r;--

I~,sur.b.".v:Vlsl,y. r ' - b , l , r . 01 *ai"iinp pan:a7mg ine era," stmepie 0 3 a g,.n, xnal* ,be m e mau2ng. Dimes rangp a, nn#*l,c talents was I1I- =een s

,"

qsre"e , a " * * v ~ " * %

Cueis House Restored


8" ALICE
N*,",O"

TheCllnr *n,,rP Ihcntcd 74 Hoooer Street, war Pr,Pno,"ely n v l ? a d ,* r'lr"r *);


Src'"dar,Qeo- l,"rlrlrr.r,. an* wale, aemrgr "It ,he novae "#"hnllib8e For one ,he hO,'.P *,.3 ,"S,d-C ." *"a a,, * (.*afl*" d l t*" O.".~d CU",lF.

.'-

,",,.

-,

move,

"lrwm o.-

,"S7

ms,.

D.e="n, home,"

Figure 4 Twenty-three percent coverage General Procedures Workcentre XD SERIES

General Service Notes


manuals4you.com

Glossary of Terms
( ~ e r m (Description Table 1 Glossary of Acronyms and Terms

Table 1 Glossary of Acronyms and Terms

1 ~ e r m 1 Description
A3 A4 AC ACT AID ADJ Paper size 297 millimeters (11.69 inches) x 420 millimeters (16.54 inches). Paper size 210 millimeters (8.27 inches) x 297 millimeters (11.69 inches). of current available at the IJower source for the Alternatina Current is the t v ~ e
l l l ' , b I

FSMA GDI

GFD HFSi HVPS

Full Service Maintenance Agreement "Graphical Device Interface". Indicates that the device accepts data from a " P C using the "Windows" operating system. Windows will do the majority of the processing that enables a document to be printed and will send it to the printer for output. Ground Fault Device High Frequency Service Item High Voltage Power Supply

lll10.

Advanced Customer Training: A course that teaches customers to perform some of the service that is normally performed by a Xerox Service Representative. .. Analog to Digital refers to a conversion of signal Adjustment Procedure

IA0
ACO Bit CCD CD Chip CRUM CSE CVT

1 Americas Operations

America Customer Operations Binary digit, either 1 or 0, representing an electrical state. Charge Coupled Device (Photoelectric Converter) Circuit Diagram An Integrated Circuit (IC) (see Firmware) Customer Replaceable Unit Monitor Customer Service Engineer Constant Velocity Transport used in the SDF to move the document at scanning speed when the optics remain stationary Direct Current is the type of power the machine operates on. The machine converts DC AC power from the power source to DC power. Digital Multimeter is a generic name for a meter that measures voltage, current, or DMM electrical resistance and displays data in a digital display. DeliveryIRigger Carrier DRC DSDF Duplex Set Document Feeder. A document feeder capable of handling single and 2 /sided originals. Duplex Two sided copies External Ethernet Adapter is used to connect the 2141212 DCIP to a network for EEA access by more than one workstation. EHIS EME EP ESD ESU FIA Environmental Health and Safety Electromagnetic Emissions are emitted from the machine during normal operation and the power of these emissions are reduced bv machine design features. I 1 Environmental Partner Electrostatic Discharge. A transfer of charge between bodies at different electrostatic potential. Electrostatic Set Up Foreign Interface Accessory allows hardware such as a devise that accepts coins for copies (Coin-Op) or a CopytronIAuditron (a devise that enables copying with a plug in key) to be connected to the 2141212. Using the 2141212 as a printer is not possible in these applications. A Chip loaded with software identified by a date or revision.

OEM OGM PC PCL

Original equipment manufacturer On-going Maintenance Personal Computer "Printer Control Language". An " H P developed printer control language. The computer or host will encode the imageldocument into PCL language. This information is sent to the printer where, the printer will do the majority of the processing as it decodes the information received and prints the image. Publication Comment Sheet Parts List Part of (Assemblv Name) Printed Wiring Board Portable Work Station Random Access Memory device. A digital memory circuit from which information can be accessed or where software information can be stored. RAM is its accepted name, but does not describe its function. A better name would be Readmrite Memory, because the controller can read the information and it can write the information. Repair Analysis Procedure for diagnosis of machine status codes and abnormal con. ditions ReductionlEnlargement refers to features selection or components that enable reduction or enlargement

p
1 PCS
PWB

FIRM-

General Procedures

Glossary of Terms

Table 1 Glossary of Acronyms and Terms Term REP Description

Repair Procedure for disassembly and reassembly of the component on the machine Read Only Memory. A digital memory circuit that is designed to contain permanent ROM software information. The name means that the controller on the PWB can only read the information from the ROM. The controller or any other device cannot change the values or send any software information to the ROM. Raster Output Scanner - The devise that transfers the digitally processed image, ROS using laser light, to the photoreceptor. Solid Area Density SAD Set Document Feeder SDF Service Call Procedure SCP Short Edge Feed SEF Self-test An automatic process that is used to check the Control Logic circuitry. Any fault that is detected during the self-test is displayed by a fault code or by LED'Son the PWB. SlMM Single lnline Memory Module used in the Printer PWB to increase the printers printing capacity Simplex Single sided copies /Trail Edge of the copy or print paper, with reference to definition of term LE TE

UM UI US W/ W/O XBRA XCL XE XLA

/Unscheduled Maintenance User Interface United States With indicates a machine condition where the specified condition is present Without indicates a machine condition where the specified condition is not present Xerox Brasil Xerox Canada Limited

1~ e r o x Europe

I Xerox Latin America

General Procedures Workcentre XD SERIES

Glossary of Terms
manuals4you.com

Notes:

General Procedures

4/00 6-32

Workcentre XD SERIES

7 Wiring-Data
PIugIJack Location ?ndex
Plug 1 Jack Location Index ............................

. . ............................................................. 7-3
7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8

Plug / Jack Location Drawings Power Supply PWB ......................................................................................................... Main PWB (Without SDF) .......................................................................................... Main PWB (With SDF) ................................................................................................... Machine Frame Connectors ............................................................................................

Block Schematic Diagrams 1 .1120 VAC Power Generation .....................................................................................7-10 1.2Power Generation and Distribution .......................................................................... 7-11 . . . . ............................................................................ 7-12 2.1 Mode Selection ................... 7-13 2.2 Mode Indication ......................................................................................................... 4.1 Main Drive ................................................................................................................. 7-14 . ........................................................... 7-15 5.1 SDF Document Feed .............................. . 5.2 Duplex DSDF Components ....................................................................................... 7-16 6.1 Document Illumination ............................................................................................... 7-17 6.2 Scan Drive Control ................................................................................................... 6.3 Printer Input............................................................................................................... 6.4 Image Processing ................................................................................................... 8.1 Paper Feed ............................................................................................................... 8.2 Paper Registration .................................................................................................. 8.3 Paper Tray Interlocks .................................... ............................................................ 9.1 Charge, Transfer and Detack ............. . . ............................................................... 9.2 Development ............................................................................................................. 10.1 Fusing .................................................................................................................... 10.2 Copy Exit ................................................................................................................

Workcentre XD SERIES

Wiring-Data

manuals4you.com

Wiring-Data

Workcentre XD SERIES

Table 1

Plug / Jack Location index


Table 1

PI$ no.
p1j8 p1j9

LOCATlON
To Fuser Thermistor RT1 To Toner Cartridge

FIG. 7-4 7-4

PI$ no.
CNI CN2 CN5 CN6 CNlO CN11 CNlOl CN101 CN102 CN102 CN103 CN103 CN104 CN105 CN106 CN107 CN108 CNlO9 CNl10 CN111 CN112 CN113 CN114 CN115 CN116 CN117 CN118 CN119 CN120 CN121 CN122

LOCATION
On Power supply PWB On Power supply PWB On Power supply PWB On Power supply PWB On Power supply PWB On Power supply PWB On Power supply PWB On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (With SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (With SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF) On Main PWB (Without SDF)

FIG.

PlJ6 PlJ7
-

To Fuser Heat Rod To Fuser Jam Sensor

Wiring-Data Workcentre XD SERIES

Plug /Jack Location Index manuals4you.com

Plug / Jack Location Drawings

Wiring-Data

4/00
7-4

Plug / Jack Location Drawings

Workcentre XD SERIES

Figure 1 POWER SUPPLY PWB

Wiring-Data Workcentre XD SERIES

Plug / Jack Location Drawings

manuals4you.com

MAIN PWB (WITHOUT SDF )

Figure 2 MAIN PWB (Without SDF)

Wiring-Data

Plug /Jack Location Dravvings

4/00 7-6

Workcentre XD SERIES

MAIN PWB
(redesigned)

Figure 3 MAIN PWB (With SDF)

Wiring-Data Workcentre XD SERIES

Plug / Jack Location Drawings


manuals4you.com

Wiring-Data

Plug / Jack Location Drawings

Workcentre XD SERIES

Block Schematic Diagrams

Wiring-Data Workcentre XD SERIES

Block Schematic Diagrams


manuals4you.com

= 2201240 VAC (RXL)

CONNECTOR NUIVIBEEP, IN PRENTHESIS ARE FOR MACHINES EQUIPPTEU WITH AN SDF

STANDBY POWER CHAIN 1 LEVEL 2 SHEET 1 OF 2

Figure 1 : 1.1 Main Power On

Wiring-Data

Block Schematic Diagrams

Workcentre XD SERIES

1.2 Power Generation and Distribution

DC POWER GENERATION

IN PRENTHESIS UIPPED WITH AN


.

STANDBY POWER CHAIN 1 LEVEL 2

SHEET 1 OF1 SKY 1002A

Figure 2 : 1.2 Power Generation and Distribution

Wiring-Data Workcentre XD SERIES

Block Schematic Diagrams

manuals4you.com

(Quantity

(Quantry

NOTE

l~ach~iie equipped s ~ tTray l 2,and ~ or Wultiapie Bypass tiays oiily

MODE SELECTION CHAIN 2 LEVEL 2 SHEET 1 OF 2

Figure 3 : 2 . : Mode Selection

Wiring-Data

Block Schematic Diagrams

Workcentre XD SERIES

2.2 Mode Indication


Control Console PWB FL 1 3

Figure 4 : 2.2 Mode lndication Wiring-Data

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES 7-13

Block Schematic Diagrams

manuals4you.com

Mali? ividor On

IVlAlN MOTOR MOT1 RUNS WHEN THE READY LAMP IS ON AND START IS PRESSED \WHEN THE MAIN MOTOR IS ON THE VOLTAGE DECREASES TO APPROXIMATELY 1OTO 14VDC

CONNECTOR NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR IVIACHINES EQUIPPED WITH AN SDF WlACHlNE RUN CONTROL SHEET 1 OF 1

Figure 5 : 4.1 Main Drive

Wiring-Data

Block Schematic Diagrams

4/00 7-14

Workcentre XD SERIES

SIGNAL READS APPROXIMATELY 23 VAC'WHEN MOTOR IS OPERATING

SDF DOCUMENT FEED CHAIN 5 1 SHEET 1 OF2 SKY-5001

Figure 6 : 5.1 SDF Document Feed

4/00

Wiring-Data

Workcentre XD SERIES

7-1 i !

Block Schematic Diagrams

manuals4you.com

(MACHINES WITH DUPLEX SDF ONLY)

MAIN PWB DSDF Transport

DSDF Exit Roll

SGF Deflection Gate Solenold On iL) +24 VDC

(under SOL2)

SDF DOCUMENT FEED CHAIN 5 LEVEL 2 SHEET 2 OF 2

Figure 7 : 5.2 Duplex DSDF Components

Wiring-Data

Block Schematic Diagrams

4/00

7-1 6

Workcentre XD SERIES

6.1 Document Illumination

MAIN PWB PL 7.1

CONTROL LOGIC

NOTES

THIS SIGNAL IS NOT MEASURABLE

CONNECTOR NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR IvlACHlNES EQUIPPED WITH AN SDF.

Maln PWB (Wlthout SDF)

Ivlaln PWB (With SDF)

CHAIN6 LEVEL 2

Figure 8 : 6.1 Documentation Illumination Wiring-Data Workcentre XD SERIES

Block Schematic Diagrams

manuals4you.com

SCAN HOME

Maln PWB (With SDF)

Scan Home Sensor Q5

0
@

STEP 0 THRU STEP 3 SIGNALS ARE APPROXIMATELY 13 2 1 0 5VDC TO GND WHEN MOTOR IS OPERATING CONNECTORNUMBERSIN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH AN SDF

M a r PWB (Without SDF)

Figure 9 : 6.2 Scan Drive Control Wiring-Data

Block Schematic Diagrams

Workcentre XD SERIES

6.3 PRINTER INPUT

NOTE.

CONNECTOR NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR MACHINES EQUIPPED ! , W I T H AN SDF Maln PWB (Wlthout SDF) PRINTER INPUT CHAIN6 LEVEL 2 SHEET 1 OF 1

Figure 10 : 6 . 3 Printer Input Wiring-Data

4/00
Workcentre XD SERIES
7-19

Block Schematic Diagrams

manuals4you.com

LASER ASSElvlBLY PL 3 3 CN I

CN121

NOTE

CONNECTOR NUIVIBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH AN SDF

Mail? PWB (iVQhout SDF)

XEROGRAPHICS

Figure 11 : 6.4 image Processing Wiring-Data

Biock Schematic Diagrams

4/00 7-20

Workcentre XD SERIES

Paper At Paper Feed Sensor

Paper At Tray 2

A PAPER JAM WILL OCCUR (PAPER JAM LAMP FLASHING) IF. A. THE PAPER FEED SENSOR IS ACTUATED AT POWER ON THE PAPER FEED SENSOR DOES NOT DEACTUATE IN TIME B

Tray 2 Feed Solenold

A FLASHING ' P STATUS CODE WILL BE DISPLAYED IF THE PAPER FEED SENSOR Q1 IS NOT ACTUATED IN TIIVIE AFTER START IS PRESSED CONNECTOR NUMBERS lN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR [VIACHINES EQUIPPED WITH AN SDF

PAPER FEED CHAIN 8 LEVEL 2 SHEET I OF I

Figure 12 : 8.1 Paper Feed


4/00 7-21

Wiring-Data

Workcentre XD SERIES

Block Schematic Diagrams

manuals4you.com

Fuser Jam Sensor Q3

A PAPER JAM WILL OCCUR (PAPER JAM LAMP FLASHING) IF A THE PAPER FEED SENSOR IS ACTUATED AT POlnIER ON 5 THE PAPER FEED SENSOR DOES NOT DEACTUATE IN TIME

@A

FLASHINC P STATUS CODE WILL BE DISPLAYED IF THE PAPER

Figure 13 : 8.2 Paper Registration Wiring-Data

Block Schematic Diagrams

Workcentre XD SERIES

8.3 Paper Tray Interlocks

l p L i l /
MAIN PWB

CONTROL CONSOLE PWB PL 1 3

0
@

CONNECTOR NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR lvi4CHlNES EQUPED WWH AN SDF

TRAY LEDs WILL FLASH WHEN THE TRAY IS SELCETED AND OPEN

PAPER SUPPLY CHAIN 8 LEVEL 2 SHEET 1 OF1

Figure 14 : 8.3 Paper Tray lnterlocks

Wiring-Data Workcentre XD SERIES

Block Schematic Diagrams

manuals4you.com

9.1 Charge, Transfer And Detack

CONSOLE DRUM CARTRIDGE RESET SWITCH PL51 Contra1 Console Harness New Drum Sensed (H) +5 VDC BRN POWER

MAIN PWB

-I

RESET

Q
124 VDC

GND

N O T E 5 0

~~~U~~~~ COPY COUNT WILL RESETTO 0 WHEN THE NEVI DRUM SENSOR IS

CODE [6-21 18-31 [8-41

GRfDSIGNALA

GRID SIGNAL B

NORMAL PHOTO SAVE

+24 VDC +24 VDC XEROGRAPHICS CHAIN 9 LEVEL 2

Figure 15 : 9.1 Charge, Transfer and Detack Wiring-Data

Block Schematic Diagrams

4/00 7-24

Workcentre XD SERIES

LOW TONE

GND

+24VDC

XEROGRAPHICS TONER DISPENSE

Figure 16 : 9.2 Development

Workcentre XD SERIES

4/00 7-25

Block Schematic Diagrams

Wiring-Data

manuals4you.com

"
7

H2 = THERhlllSTOR IS OPEN

Tlitiimlstor RTI

H4 = FUSER DOES NOT VVARId UP WITHIN 27 SECONDS QIHEN AN H OR L STATUS CODE IS PRESENT THE POWER RELAY SIGNAL GOES HIGH REMOVING POWER TO

= 2201240 VAC (BOHZ)

@
@

REFER TO BSD 1 1 TO CHECKTHE OPERATION OF RELAY RY1

FUSING AND COPY EXIT CHAIN 10 LEVEL 2 SHEET 1 OF 2

CONNECTOR NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH AN SDF

Figure 17 : 10.1 Fusing

Wiring-Data

Block Scl-rernalic Diagrams

MAIN PWB

GRY

Paper Exlt Sensor 0 4

ONLY)

-. -.-.-

::

@
@

A PAPER JAM WILL OCCUR (PAPER JAM LAlVlP FLASHING) IF A EXIT SENSOR Q4 IS ACTUATED AT POWER ON B PAPER LEAD EDGE DOES NOT ACTUATE THE EXlT SENSOR Q4 IN TliblE C EXlT SENSOR Q4 REMAINS ACTUATED TOO LONG AFTER THE COPY CYCLE CONNECTOR NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR lvlACHlNES EQUIPPED WITH AN SDF FUSING AND COPY EXIT CHAIN 1 0 L LEVEL 2 SHEET 2 OF 2 SKY-1013

Figure 18 : 10.2 Copy Exit Wiring-Data Workcentre XD SERIES

Block Schematic Diagrams


manuals4you.com

This page intensionally left blank

Wiring-Data

4/00
7-28

Block Schematic Diagrams

Workcentre XD SERIES

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen